BS-240

BS-240
Chemistry Analyzer
Service Manual
© 2016 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Operator's Manual, the issue date is 2016-04.
BS-240 Operator's Manual i

Intellectual Property Statement
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)
owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This
manual may refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey
any license under the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.
Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any
other derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written
permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
, , , , BeneView, WATO,
BeneHeart, are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in China and
other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for
informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.
ii BS-240 Service Manual

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be
liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product,
only if:
 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
 the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national
and local requirements; and
 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Warning
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out
a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine
breakdown or personal injury.
Note
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.
BS-240 Service Manual iii

Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation
or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay
resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or
accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized
personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or
unauthorized service people.
 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
Customer service department

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech
industrial park, Nanshan, Shenzhen 518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: service@mindray.com
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
EC - Representative
EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)
Address: Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany
Tel: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726
iv BS-240 Service Manual

Preface
Preface
This manual contains the instructions necessary to operate the product safely and in
accordance with its function and intended use. Please read this manual thoroughly before
using the product. Observance of this manual is a prerequisite for proper performance
and correct operation, and it ensures patient and operator safety. All graphics including
screens and printouts in this manual are for illustration purpose only and must not be
used for any other purposes. The screens and printouts on the actual product should
prevail.
Product introduction
BS-240 is a computer-controlled fully-automated chemistry analyzer, intended for
quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, cerebrospinal
fluid (CSF), and other human body fluids. It can fulfill auto dispensing, reaction,
colorimetric measurement, process monitoring, and result calculation. It provides
measurement of multiple biochemistries and ISE (ion-selective electrode) tests (Na+, K+
and Cl-), with maximum throughput up to 400 tests per hour. It is one of the necessary
tools for laboratory automation.
BS-240 Service Manual 1

Safety Information
Safety information
This chapter provides you with safety symbols used in this manual and their meanings,
summarizes the safety hazards and operating precautions that should be considered
seriously when the instrument is being operated, and lists the labels and silkscreens that
have been applied to the instrument and their indications.

Safety symbols
Safety symbols are used in this manual in order to remind you of the instructions
necessary to operate the product safely and in accordance with its function and intended
use. A safety symbol and text constitutes a warning as shown in the table below:
Symbol Text Description

WARNING Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause
personal injury.
BIOHAZARD Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
CAUTION Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to a possibility of system damage or unreliable
results.
NOTE Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is
alerting you to information that requires your attention.
2 BS-240 Service Manual

Summary of hazards
This section lists hazards of the instrument itself. The hazards of specific operation are
included in the warning information of each operation task.
Observe the following safety precautions when using the product. Ignoring any of them
may lead to personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
If the product is used in a manner not specified by our company, the protection
provided by the product may be impaired.
Electric shock hazards
WARNING
When the MAIN POWER is turned on, users other than the servicing personnel
authorized by our company must not open the rear cover or side cover.
Spillage of reagent or sample on the product may cause equipment failure and even
electric shock. Do not place sample and reagent on the product. In case of spillage,
switch off the power immediately, remove the spillage and contact our Customer
Service Department or your local distributor.
Moving Parts Hazards
WARNING
Do not touch such moving parts as sample/reagent carousel, reaction carousel, probe,
mixer, and cuvette wash station, when the system is in operation.
Exercise caution while using the ISE module. Prevent your hair, legs or other parts of
your body from being hurt by the driving parts.
Do not put your fingers or hands into any open part when the system is in operation.
Photometer lamp hazards
WARNING
Eye injury could occur from light emission from the photometer lamp. Do not stare into
the lamp when the system is in operation.
If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the MAIN POWER and then
wait at least 10 minutes for the lamp to cool down before touching it. Do not touch the
lamp before it cools down, or you may get burned.

Laser beam hazards
WARNING
Light emitted by the bar code reader may cause eye injury. Do not stare into the laser
beam radiated from the bar code reader when the system is in operation.
Sample, calibrator and control hazards
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriately handling samples, controls and calibrators may lead to biohazardous
infection. Do not touch samples, controls, calibrators, mixtures, or waste with your
bare hands. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow the standard
laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.
The serum samples remaining in the electrodes may contain a great number of viruses.
Wear gloves to prevent infection while operating around the electrodes.
Reagent and wash solution hazards
WARNING
Reagents and concentrated wash solution are corrosive to human skins. Exercise
caution when using reagents and concentrated wash solution. In case your skin or
clothes contact them, wash them off with soap and clean water. If reagents or wash
solution spills into your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an oculist.
Waste hazards
BIOHAZARD
Some substances contained in reagent, control, calibrator, concentrated wash solution,
and waste are subject to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose of the
waste in accordance with your local or national rule for biohazard waste disposal and
consult the manufacturer or distributor of the reagents for details.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
System disposal hazards
WARNING
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations. Dispose of the
waste analyzer in accordance with your local or national rule for waste disposal.

Fire and explosion hazards
WARNING
Ethanol is flammable substance. Please exercise caution while using ethanol around the
instrument in order to prevent fire and explosion.
Removal of analyzer from use for repair or disposal
WARNING
When the analyzer is not in use, for example, in repair, transportation or disposal
process, please clean and sterilize the parts that may cause biohazards(probe, mixer,
etc.) and remind the person who handles the device of the related hazards.

Summary of precautions
This section lists precautions to be understood during instrument operation. The
precautions of specific operation are included in the warning information of each
operation task.
To use the product safely and efficiently, pay attention to the following operating
precautions.
Intended use
WARNING
The instrument is an automated chemistry analyzer for in vitro diagnostic use in clinical
laboratories and designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries
in serum, plasma, urine and cerebrospinal fluid samples. Please consult us before you
use the instrument for other purposes.
When drawing a clinical conclusion, please also refer to patients' clinical symptoms and
other test results.
Environment precautions
CAUTION
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by this manual.
Installing and operating the system in other environment may lead to unreliable results
and even equipment damage.
To relocate the system, please contact our Customer Service Department or your local
distributor.
Electromagnetic noise precautions
CAUTION
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system. Do not install
devices generating excessive electromagnetic noise around the system. Do not use such
devices as radio transmitters in the room housing the system. Do not use other CRT
displays around the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may generate
electromagnetic noise to interfere with their operations.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation
(e.g. mobile phones or radio transmitters), as these may interfere with the proper
operation.

The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation of the device.
This device has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, and in a domestic
environment may cause radio interference, in which case, you may need to take
measures to mitigate the interference.
NOTE
It is the manufacturer's responsibility to provide equipment electromagnetic
compatibility information to the customer or user.
It is the user's responsibility to ensure that a compatible electromagnetic environment
for the equipment can be maintained in order that it will perform as intended.
Operating precautions
CAUTION
Take the clinical symptoms or other test results of the patient into considerations when
making diagnosis based on the measuring results produced by the system.
Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate use of the
system may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment damage or personal injury.
When using the system for the first time, run calibrations and QC tests to make sure
the system is in proper state.
Be sure to run QC tests every time when you use the system, otherwise the result may
be unreliable.
Do not uncover the reagent carousel when the system is in operation. Keep the reagent
carousel cover closed.
The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is used for connection with the operation unit
only. Do not use it for other connections. Use the cables provided by our company or
your local distributor for the connection.
The operation unit is a personal computer with the operating software installed.
Installing other software or hardware on the computer may interfere with the system
operation. Do not run other software when the system is working.
Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not use the
computer for other purposes or connect it to the Internet. If the computer is infected
by virus, please install anti-virus software to check for and clear virus.
Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands with chemicals.
Do not place the MAIN POWER to ON again within 10 seconds after placing it to OFF;
otherwise the system may enter the protection status. If it does so, place the MAIN
POWER to OFF and place it to ON again.

Chemistry parameter configuration precautions
CAUTION
To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and wavelength, follow
the instructions in this manual and the instructions of reagents.
ISE module precautions
CAUTION
To prevent ISE electrodes from being damaged due to water scarcity, if the system,
when equipped with an ISE module, will be powered off for a long time, perform the
electrode storage maintenance.
Sample precautions
CAUTION
Use samples that are completely free of insoluble substances like fibrin or suspended
matter; otherwise the sample probe may be clogged.
Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to unreliable results.
Hemolysis, icterus or lipemia in the samples may lead to unreliable test results; running
a sample blank, therefore, is recommended.
Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the compositions of samples
and lead to unreliable results.
Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the sample open for a
long period.
Prepare sufficient sample volume before analysis.
Load samples to correct positions on the sample carousel before the analysis begins;
otherwise reliable results may not be obtained.

Reagent, calibrator and control precautions
CAUTION
Use proper reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
Select appropriate reagents according to the performance characteristics of the system.
Consult the reagent suppliers, our company or our authorized distributor for details, if
you are not sure about your reagent choice.
Store and use the reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by the
suppliers; otherwise, reliable results or best performance of the system may not be
obtained. Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and controls may lead to unreliable
results and bad performance of the system even in validity period.
Perform calibration after changing the reagents, otherwise reliable results may not be
obtained.
Contamination caused by carryover among reagents may lead to unreliable test results.
Consult the reagent suppliers for details.
ISE calibration precautions
BIOHAZARD
The calibrators contain preservatives. In case your skin contacts calibrators, wash them
off with soap and water. In case the calibrators spill into your eyes, rinse them with
water and consult an oculist. If you swallow them by mistake, see a doctor.
CAUTION
Use the calibrators specified by our company. Use of other reagents or calibrators may
result in unreliable results, or damage the Hydropneumatic system, or even shorten the
electrodes life span.
Prior to using the calibrators, check if they are within the expiration date.
Place them correctly; otherwise, it may cause unreliable results, or leak, or module
damage.
ISE wash solution biohazards
BIOHAZARD
The ISE wash solution is sodium hypochlorite. Use the ISE wash solution carefully to
prevent it from contacting your skins or eyes. If your skins or eyes contact the ISE wash
solution, rinse them off with fresh water and consult a doctor.

Data archiving precautions
NOTE
The system automatically stores the data to the built-in hard disk. Data loss, however,
is still possible due to mis-deletion or physical damage of the hard disk. You are
recommended to regularly archive the data to such medium as CDs.
To avoid the data loss caused by unexpected power failure, UPS (uninterrupted power
supply) is recommended.
External equipment precautions
WARNING
For operating instructions and precautions of the computer and printer, please refer to
their operation manuals.
External equipment connected to the analogue and digital interfaces must be
authorized and complied with relevant safety and EMC standards (e.g., IEC 60950
Safety of Information Technology Equipment Standard and CISPR 22 EMC of Information
Technology Equipment Standard (CLASS B)). Any person, who connects additional
equipment to the signal input or output ports and configures an IVD system, is
responsible for ensuring that the system works normally and complies with the safety
and EMC requirements. If you have any questions, consult the technical services
department of your local representative.
Tube and liquid container precautions
WARNING
When the tube or the part that contain liquid become aged or damaged, please stop its
use immediately and contact our customer service department or your local distributor
to check and replace it.

Labels and silkscreen
The following non-warning and warning labels and silkscreen are used on the product for
system identification and operating instruction.
Check the labels regularly for cleanliness and integrity. If any of the labels becomes vague
or peels off, contact our Customer Service Department or your local distributor for
replacement.
Non-warning labels and silkscreen

Serial number
This symbol, contained in the product label which is attached to the rear cover of the
system, indicates the production serial number of the product.
Date of manufacture
system, indicates the manufacture date of the product.
In vitro diagnostic equipment

system, indicates that the product is in vitro diagnostic equipment.
European community representative

system, indicates the name and address of the authorized representative in the European
Community.

WEEE label
The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU member states only.
The use of this symbol indicates that this product should not be treated as household
waste. By ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent
bringing potential negative consequences to the environment and human health. For
more detailed information with regard to returning and recycling this product, please
consult the distributor from whom you purchased the product.
Main power switch: ON

This symbol located on the main power switch indicates that the system power is on
when the switch is toggled rightwards to expose this symbol and ON character and the
green light is lightened.
Main power switch: OFF

This symbol located on the main power switch indicates that the system power is off
when the switch is toggled leftwards to expose this symbol and OFF character and the
green light is extinguished. All components including the reagent refrigeration system
will be stopped.
Analyzer power switch

This symbol located on the analyzer power switch indicates that the analyzer power is on
when the switch is on the dotted-circle portion and off when it is on the blank-circle
portion.
Network interface
This symbol located on the network interface indicates the connection between the
analyzer and the operation unit.

Serial port
This symbol located on the serial port indicates the connection between the analyzer and
the operation unit.
Electrical ground
This symbol indicates an electrical ground.
Interfaces for fluid connection

This symbol located on the right panel of the analyzer indicates the connection of fluid
tubing.

Near ISE tube installation unit
This symbol indicates a specific name of the ISE tube.
Humidity limit
This symbol indicates a humidity limit on a normally working instrument.
Barometric limit
This symbol indicates a barometric limit on a normally working instrument.
Temperature limit
This symbol indicates a temperature limit on a normally working instrument.

Warning Labels
Biohazard warning
This label indicating the risk of biohazardous infection is located in the following
positions:
 Probe
 Waste outlet
 Waste tank
Moving parts warning

This symbol and text indicating the hazardous moving parts is located in the following
positions:
 Probe
 Mixer
Laser warning
This symbol and text located near the bar code reader reminds you of not staring into the
laser beam.
Photometer lamp warning

This symbol and text located on the lamp housing reminds you of not touching the lamp
before it gets cool.

Probe collision warning
This symbol and text located near the sample/reagent carousel and reaction carousel
reminds you of not opening the cover to prevent from damaging the probe.
Upper cover
This symbol and text located on the transparent upper cover reminds you of not wipe the
upper cover with ethanol or other organic solutions.
ISE module
This symbol and text located on the left side panel of the analyzer. Please turn off the main
power before opening the small door.
Liquid level floater

This symbol and text is located near the DI water tank liquid level floater, Please do not
take out the liquid level floater during test.
Cuvette replacement window

This symbol and text is located on the cuvette replacement window.

Safety Information
Table of Contents
Intellectual Property Statement ............................................................................................................................................. ii

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party........................................................................................................................ iii
Warranty ........................................................................................................................................................................................ iv
Exemptions ..................................................................................................................................................................... iv
Customer service department ................................................................................................................................ iv
EC - Representative ..................................................................................................................................................... iv
Preface ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Product introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 1
Safety information ··································································································· 1
Safety symbols............................................................................................................................................................................... 2
Summary of hazards................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Summary of precautions .......................................................................................................................................................... 6
Labels and silkscreen .............................................................................................................................................................. 11
Non-warning labels and silkscreen..................................................................................................................... 11
Warning Labels................................................................................................................................................................ 15
1 System Description ······························································································1-1
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit ................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Functions of Analyzing Unit ........................................................................................................................................ 1-5
2 System Performance and Workflow ··········································································2-1
2.1 Major Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.1.1 General Specifications.................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.2 Sample Specifications................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Reagent Specifications ................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System .......................................................................................................... 2-6
BS-240 Service Manual I

Table of Contents
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation Unit .............................................................................................................. 2-7

2.1.6 Typical Test Procedure ................................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.1.7 Startup Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.1.8 Shutdown Procedure .................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.1.9 Workflow Descriptions ................................................................................................................................ 2-9
2.1.10 Measuring Points ...................................................................................................................................... 2-10
3 Installation Requirements and Procedure ··································································3-1
3.1 Check before Installation ............................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Installation Environment ............................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.2 Configuration Check ..................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Installation Requirements ............................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation ................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 Power Supply and Noise ............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage ...................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Computer Requirements(for International Customers).................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.1 CPU ...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.2 Memory.............................................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.3 Network Adapter............................................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.3.4 Serial Port ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.5 Hard disk defragment .................................................................................................................................. 3-5
3.3.6 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby ......................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.7 Screen Display Properties .......................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................................................. 3-10
3.4.1 Unpacking ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.4.2 Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.4.3 Fluidic Connection ...................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.4.4 Connection of Analyzer ............................................................................................................................ 3-13
3.4.5 Startup ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.4.6 Fluidic Prime................................................................................................................................................. 3-15
3.4.7 Initial Maintenance Record .................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.4.8 Startup Initialization .................................................................................................................................. 3-17
3.4.9 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters of Mindray Reagents ........................... 3-18
3.4.10 System Performance Test ..................................................................................................................... 3-21
3.5 Stop Use ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-23
3.5.1 Stop Use for Short Term ........................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.5.2 Stop Use for Long Term ............................................................................................................................ 3-23
II BS-240 Service Manual

Table of Contents
4 Software Introduction ··························································································4-1
4.1 Software Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package ....................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Folder Structure ............................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Log Files ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.1.4 Normal Startup Procedure.......................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2 Software Upgrading......................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3 Software Uninstallation .................................................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.3.1 Uninstalling BS-240 Software ................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.2 Uninstalling SQL Database ......................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.4 Database Backup and Restoration ............................................................................................................................ 4-8
4.4.1 Database Backup ............................................................................................................................................ 4-8
4.4.2 Database Restoration ................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.5 Demo Software Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-9
5 Modules and Units ·······························································································5-1
5.1 Shell Assembly .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2

5.1.1 Main functions ................................................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ................................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.3 Replacing sheilding cover ........................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Left and Right Panels ............................................................................ 5-4
5.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel ............................................................................................... 5-5
5.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Panels .......................................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.7 Replacing Air Spring ..................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.8 Cleaning Fans ................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2 Frame Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.1 Main functions ................................................................................................................................................ 5-9
5.2.2 Component Locations and FRU Details .............................................................................................. 5-10
5.2.3 Replacing Front and Rear Dust Screens ............................................................................................ 5-10
5.3 Reaction Carousel Assembly .................................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.3.1 Main functions ............................................................................................................................................. 5-12
5.3.2 Locations and FRU details ........................................................................................................................ 5-13
5.3.3 Replacing Cables of Upper Cover Assembly ..................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.4 Replacing Heat Chamber Assembly Cables ...................................................................................... 5-16
5.3.5 Replacing Cables of Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor ................................................. 5-19
5.3.6 Replacing Motor Assembly and Synchronous Belt ....................................................................... 5-21
BS-240 Service Manual III

Table of Contents
5.3.7 Replacing Reaction Cuvette ..................................................................................................................... 5-23

5.4 Sample/reagent carousel assembly ...................................................................................................................... 5-24
5.4.1 Main functions ............................................................................................................................................. 5-24
5.4.2 Assembly Locations and FRU Details .................................................................................................. 5-25
5.4.3 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Body Assembly ................................................................. 5-27
5.4.4 Replacing Temperature Sensor ............................................................................................................. 5-28
5.4.5 Replacing Peltier and Sealing Ring ...................................................................................................... 5-30
5.4.6 Replacing Cables of Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor ................................................. 5-32
5.4.7 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly ............................................................... 5-34
5.4.8 Replacing the synchronous belt ............................................................................................................ 5-35
5.4.9 Replacing Reagent Refrigeration and Radiating Fans.................................................................. 5-37
5.4.10 Replacing Bar Code Reader ................................................................................................................... 5-38
5.4.11 Replacing Reagent Carousel Antifogging Heating Assembly ................................................. 5-40
5.5 Sample Probe Movement Assembly ...................................................................................................................... 5-42
5.5.1 Main functions ............................................................................................................................................. 5-42
5.5.3 Replacing Horizontal Movement Photocoupler and Vertical Movement Photocoupler . 5-45
5.5.4 Replacing Sample Probe Assembly, Anti-collision Spring and Power Screw ..................... 5-46
5.5.5 Replacing Reagent Preheating Assembly .......................................................................................... 5-48
5.5.6 Replacing Level Sense Board ................................................................................................................. 5-49
5.5.7 Replacing Horizontal Rotating Synchronous Belt .......................................................................... 5-50
5.5.8 Replacing Horizontal Motor Assembly............................................................................................... 5-51
5.5.9 Replacing Sample Probe Drive Assembly .......................................................................................... 5-53
5.6 Mixer Movement Assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 5-55
5.6.1 Main functions ............................................................................................................................................. 5-55
5.6.3 Replacing Horizontal Movement Photocoupler and Vertical Movement Photocoupler . 5-57
5.6.4 Replacing horizontal rotating synchronous belt ............................................................................ 5-58
5.6.5 Replacing Horizontal Motor Assembly............................................................................................... 5-59
5.6.6 Replacing DC Motor, Mixer and Powder Screw ............................................................................... 5-61
5.6.7 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly .............................................................................................. 5-62
5.7 Wash Assembly .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-65
5.7.1 Main functions ............................................................................................................................................. 5-65
5.7.2 Locations and FRU Details ....................................................................................................................... 5-66
5.7.3 Replacing Wash Probe Assembly ......................................................................................................... 5-67
5.7.4 Replacing Wash Station Photocoupler ................................................................................................ 5-68
IV BS-240 Service Manual

Table of Contents
5.7.5 Replacing Wash Probe Drive Assembly ............................................................................................. 5-69

5.7.6 Replacing Zero Position Photocoupler ............................................................................................... 5-71
5.8 Syringe Assembly.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-73
5.8.1 Main functions ............................................................................................................................................. 5-73
5.8.3 Replacing 2.5ml Syringe and 10ml Syringe ..................................................................................... 5-74
5.8.4 Replacing Syringe ....................................................................................................................................... 5-74
5.9 Photoelectric Unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-75
5.9.1 Functions and Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 5-75
5.9.2 Composition and Structure of Optical Assembly............................................................................ 5-76
5.9.3 Replacing Lamp ........................................................................................................................................... 5-78
5.9.4 Disassembling/Assembling Optical Assembly ............................................................................... 5-79
5.9.5 Replacing Filter ............................................................................................................................................ 5-81
5.9.6 Replacing Preamplifier Board ............................................................................................................... 5-82
5.9.7 Replacing lamp fan...................................................................................................................................... 5-83
5.9.8 Replacing Reaction Cuvette ..................................................................................................................... 5-84
5.9.9 Replacing AD collection board ............................................................................................................... 5-85
5.10 ISE Unit (Optional) .................................................................................................................................................... 5-87
5.10.1 Module Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 5-87
5.10.2 Structure and FRU List ........................................................................................................................... 5-87
5.10.3 Unclogging Waste Tubes ....................................................................................................................... 5-90
5.10.4 Replacing Pump Tube............................................................................................................................. 5-91
5.10.5 Replacing Calibrator Tube .................................................................................................................... 5-92
5.10.6 Inventory Calculation of Reagent Pack ............................................................................................ 5-93
6 Hardware Circuits ·······························································································6-1
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2 Hazards ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Summary of PCBAs ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4 Functions of PCBA ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.4.1 Control Structure ............................................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.4.2 Main Control Board ....................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.4.3 Power drive board ...................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.4.4 AD collection board .................................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.4.5 Pre-amplification Board .......................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.4.6 Level sense board ....................................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.4.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board ................................................................................................................. 6-23
BS-240 Service Manual V

Table of Contents
6.5 Power Supply System .................................................................................................................................................. 6-29

6.5.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit................................................................................................... 6-29
6.5.2 Performance Indices ................................................................................................................................. 6-29
6.5.3 Power supply board .................................................................................................................................. 6-30
6.6 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer .................................................................................................................................... 6-35
7 Hydropneumatic System ·······················································································7-1
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7.2 Fluidic Diagram ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System ................................................................................................................. 7-11
7.3.2 Probe wash module .................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.3 Cuvette Wash Module ................................................................................................................................ 7-12
7.3.4 Inlet/outlet module ..................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.3.5 Other ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-15
7.4 Introduction of Fluidic Actions................................................................................................................................. 7-17
7.4.1 Fluidic Initialization ................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.4.2 Priming Wash Station ................................................................................................................................ 7-17
7.5 Removing and Reinstalling Hydropneumatic Components ......................................................................... 7-18
7.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-18
7.5.2 Probe and Mixer Wash Module.............................................................................................................. 7-19
7.5.3 Cuvette Wash Module ................................................................................................................................ 7-25
7.5.4 External Modules......................................................................................................................................... 7-31
8 Alignment··········································································································8-1
8.1 Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2

8.1.1 Utility - Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Alignment fixtures ......................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 Mechanical Reset ........................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2 Alignment Procedure...................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3 Photoelectric Unit ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.3.1 Photoelectric collection position adjustment ...................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.2 Photoelectric gain adjustment .................................................................................................................. 8-8
8.4 Sample/reagent carousel unit ................................................................................................................................. 8-11
8.4.1 Reaction Carousel Rotary ........................................................................................................................ 8-11
8.4.2 Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Radial Position ................................................................ 8-13
8.4.3 Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring Radial Position .............................................................. 8-14
8.4.4 Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Radial Position ................................................................ 8-15
VI BS-240 Service Manual

Table of Contents
8.5 Probe unit ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-16

8.5.1 Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel ..................................................................... 8-16
8.5.2 Aligning Horizontal and Vertical Positions from Probe to Wash Well .................................. 8-17
8.5.3 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring ............................................................................. 8-18
8.5.4 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring ........................................................................... 8-18
8.5.5 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring ............................................................................. 8-19
8.5.6 Sample Probe Cuvette Height ................................................................................................................. 8-19
8.5.7 Vertical Extreme Position from Probe to Reagent Bottle ............................................................ 8-19
8.5.8 Sample Probe Rotary to ISE (Optional) .............................................................................................. 8-20
8.5.9 Sample Probe Rotary to SIC Height (Optional) ............................................................................... 8-20
8.6 Mixer Unit ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-22
8.6.1 Adjusting Horizontal Position from Mixer to Reaction Carousel ............................................ 8-22
8.6.2 Adjusting Vertical Position from Mixer to Reaction Carousel .................................................. 8-24
8.6.3 Adjusting Horizontal Position from Mixer to Wash Well............................................................ 8-24
8.7 Setting Parameters of Cuvette Wash Unit ........................................................................................................... 8-26
8.7.1 Setting Parameters of Best Alignment Position ............................................................................. 8-26
8.7.2 Adjust Horizontal Position from Wash Probe to Reaction Cuvette ........................................ 8-27
8.7.3 Cuvette Wash Station Height .................................................................................................................. 8-28
8.8 Bar Code Unit (Optional) ............................................................................................................................................ 8-30
8.8.1 Bar Code Sticking Requirements ........................................................................................................... 8-30
8.8.2 Bar code Unit................................................................................................................................................. 8-31
8.8.3 Adjusting Bar Code Reader Position .................................................................................................... 8-31
8.8.4 Bar Code Stability Test ............................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.9 Hydropneumatic Unit .................................................................................................................................................. 8-35
8.9.1 Preparations before Alignment ............................................................................................................ 8-35
8.9.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status ........................................................................................................ 8-36
8.9.3 Syringe Check ............................................................................................................................................... 8-36
8.9.4 Fluidic Prime................................................................................................................................................. 8-37
8.10 Pyrology Unit ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-39
8.10.1 Sensor Configuration window ............................................................................................................ 8-39
8.10.2 Observe Temperature Curve ............................................................................................................... 8-40
8.10.3 Wash Solution Temperature Control ................................................................................................ 8-41
8.10.4 Reagent Refrigeration Alignment ..................................................................................................... 8-42
9 Proactive Maintenance ·························································································9-1
9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-2

9.2 Maintenance Tools ........................................................................................................................................................... 9-3
BS-240 Service Manual VII

Table of Contents
9.3 Maintenance Procedure ................................................................................................................................................ 9-4

9.3.1 Execution order of maintenance items ................................................................................................. 9-4
9.3.2 Steps .................................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
10 Troubleshooting ······························································································ 10-1
10.1 Error Codes and Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................ 10-3

10.2 Error feedback sheet ............................................................................................................................................. 10-35
VIII BS-240 Service Manual

1 System Description
BS-240 Chemistry Analyzer Service Manual 1-1

1.1 Overview
1.1 Overview
The BS-240 is a fully automated and computer-controlled chemistry analyzer designed
for the in vitro determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, and
cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) samples. BS-240 consists of the analyzing unit and operation
unit.
Figure 1.1 BS-240 chemistry analyzer
The throughput of the analyzer is at most 200 tests/hour;
The throughput of the ISE module: Serum/plasma: 300 tests/hour (Na+, K+, Cl-).
Urine: 198 tests/hour (Na+, K+, Cl-).
Maximum throughput of biochemistry and ISE: 400 tests/hour.
1-2 BS-240 Service Manual

1.2 Components of Analyzing Unit

The BS-240 Chemistry Analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer), operation unit
(computer), and output unit (printer).
The analyzing unit performs all operations of sample analysis, which include dispensing
sample and reagent, mixing, reaction and measurement, washing of cuvettes, ISE analysis,
etc.
The operation unit (computer) is installed with the operating software to control the
running and operation of the analyzers and to process the test data.
The printer is used to print test results.
The operation unit and the analyzing unit are independent structurally and communicate
with each other through the serial port. The operation unit sends data and instructions to
the analyzing unit and acquires the data and status information from the analyzing unit.
Figure 1.2 System structure
Analyzer
PC (Operating
software) Chemistry Analyzer
Printer
BS-240 has a throughput of at most 200 tests per hour for single- or double- reagent
analysis, and its maximum throughput is 400 tests per hour with ISE module. The
working period is 18 seconds.
The instrument is composed of the following components: one reaction carousel, one
sample/reagent carousel, one sample probe, one mixer, one cuvette wash station, one
optical measurement system, and one ISE module(optional). The optical measurement
system, which is composed of "filters", performs photometric measurement to the
reaction cuvettes that hold "sample+reagent" mixture. After testing, a phase-8 automatic
cuvette washing is conducted by the automatic cuvette wash station.
BS-240 Service Manual 1-3

Figure 1.3 Layout of the analyzer's operation panel
(1)
(5)
(4)
(2)
(3)
(1) Sample probe (2) Sample/reagent carousel

(3) Mixer (4) Reaction carousel
(5) Cuvette wash station

1.3 Functions of Analyzing Unit

The working procedure of the system is described as follows.
1 The system resets to initialize all mechanical units and wash the exterior and
interior of the probes and mixers.
2 Perform 8-phase automatic washing for each reaction cuvette, and after phase 6,
water blank is analyzed automatically.
3 Rotate the reagent carousel to the first specified reagent position, and lower the
sample probe to aspirate the reagent.
4 The reaction cuvettes are carried to the reagent dispense position after the 8-phase
washing. Then rotate sample probe with R1 added to the reaction carousel and
dispense R1 into the reaction cuvette.
5 R1 is incubated for 10 periods in the cuvettes.
6 Rotate the sample carousel to the specified sample addition position, and lower the
sample probe into the sample carousel to aspirate a specified amount of sample.
7 Rotate the reaction cuvette with R1 added to the sample addition position, and rotate
the sample probe with sample aspirated to the reaction carousel and dispense
samples into the reaction cuvette.
8 Rotate the reaction cuvette with samples added to the mixing position for mixing.
9 For double-reagent tests, rotate the reagent carousel to the second specified reagent
position after a specific period, and lower the sample probe into the reagent carousel
to aspirate reagents.
10 The reaction cuvettes are carried to the second reagent dispense position. And the
sample probe with R2 added rotates to the reaction carousel and dispenses R2 into
the reaction cuvette.
11 With R2 added, the reaction cuvette rotates to the mixing position for stirring.
12 During each period, the reaction cuvette receives photometric measurement
(absorbance reading taking) when passing by the photometric unit.
13 The reaction cuvettes in which reaction is finished will be washed automatically
when passing by the wash station.
Table 1.1 Functions of system units
Unit Name Functions

Probe unit Performs aspiration and dispensing for all biochemistries and ISE tests.
Performs aspiration and dispensing of reagents for all biochemistry tests.

Sample/reagent The outer ring can hold 40 sample containers.

carousel unit The middle ring supports 40ml and 20ml reagent bottles, and can hold 40
sample containers via an adapter.
The inner ring supports 20ml reagent bottles.
A refrigerating environment which is constant within 2°C-12°C for 24 hours a
day is provided.
The outer and middle rings support bar code scanning.
Reaction Carousel 40 positions are available for plastic cuvettes.
Unit
Mixer Unit Mixing reactant
Photometric unit Forward splitting, filter, implementing 8-wavelength measurement, 340, 405,
450, 510, 546, 578, 630, 670nm
Cuvette Wash Unit 8-phase automatic washing of reaction cuvettes, which is performed 2 times
for 4 stations
ISE Unit (Optional) Provides the function of ISE measurement

2 System Performance and Workflow

2.1 Major Specifications
2.1.1 General Specifications
System
Random selection, multi-channel, multi-chemistry, capable to pause test and adding new
tests
System structure
Analyzing unit + computer + printer
Sample type
Serum, urine, plasma, CSF(cerebrospinal fluid), full blood, etc.
Maximum number of tests run simultaneously

39 double-reagent tests/78 single-reagent tests
Throughput
At most 200 tests/hour (single/double-reagent), and at most 400 tests/hour (with ISE
module)
Reaction types
Endpoint, Kinetic and Fixed-time; supporting single-/double-reagent tests, and single-
/double-wavelength tests.
Reaction time
The longest reaction time is 20 minutes for single-reagent test, and 10 minutes for
double-reagent test.
Reaction temperature
37±0.3°C.
Test type
Clinical chemistries, Immunoturbidimetry, Therapeutic Drug Monitoring (TDM).
Predilution
Dilution is conducted in reaction cuvette at the ratio of 3~125.
2-2 BS-240 Chemistry Analyzer Service Manual

Operation mode
Chemistries are defined one by one via the operating software; panels and calculation
tests are supported.
Math Model
Single-point linear, two-point linear, multi-point linear, Logit-Log 4P, Logit-Log 5P, Spline,
Exponential, Polynomial, and Parabola.
QC
Westgard multi rules, cumulative sum check, and twin-plot.
Result Printouts
Capable of storing and outputting various types of data and charts, and calculating among
different chemistries.
Dimensions
Analyzing unit: l×b×h: 690 mm×580 mm×595 mm;
Weight
Analyzing unit: 79 kg;
STAT sample
Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority.
Networking
Allowed to connect with a LIS (Laboratory Information Management System).
2.1.2 Sample Specifications
Sample loading
Samples are loaded via sample carousel.
Sample cuvette type

Table 2.1 Sample tube volume and dead volume
Sample Container Specification

Sample cup(Beckman) Φ14×25mm,
0.5ml(Beckman microtube)
Sample cup(Beckman) Φ14×25mm, 2ml(Beckman microtube)
Sample cup(Beckman) Φ12×37mm, 2ml (Hitachi)
Primary tube or plastic tube Φ12×68.5 mm
Primary tube or plastic tube Φ12×99 mm
Primary tube or plastic tube Φ12.7×75 mm

Sample Container Specification

Primary tube or plastic tube Φ12.7×100 mm
Primary tube or plastic tube Φ13 X 75 mm
Least sample volume

The same container requires a sample to be 8mm higher than the unacceptable sample
level height.
Sample carousel
The sample and the reagent share a carousel, and all sample positions of the outer ring
and the middle ring support bar code scanning.
Sample positions on sample carousel

The outer ring can hold 40 samples, the middle ring can hold at most 40 samples via an
adapter, and the outer ring and the middle ring contain at most 80 sample positions in
total.
STAT sample
Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with highest priority.
Sample volume
2μl ~ 45μl, with an increment of 0.1μl
ISE: 70μl for serum and 140μl for urine
Sample probe
The sample and the reagent share one probe, featuring level detection (vertical collision
detection) and level tracking.
Sample probe cleaning

The exterior and interior of the sample probe is washed with carryover rate less than or
equal to 0.05%.
Sample input mode (bar code)

Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, Code128, Code39, UPC/EAN, and Code93
Minimum bar code 0.19mm~0.5mm
density
Data bits 3-27 bits
Format and content Defined by user
Maximum width 55mm

Name Value
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum ±5°
inclination angle
Print quality No less than Class C according to the ANSI MH10.8M
Print Quality Specification.
Width and 2.5-3.0:1
narrowness
2.1.3 Reagent Specifications
Reagent loading
Samples are loaded via reagent carousel.
Reagent bar code

Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, Code128, Code39, UPC/EAN, and
Code93
Minimum bar code density 0.25mm~0.5mm
Data bits 13~30 bits
Format and content Defined by user
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum inclination angle ±5°
Print quality Class A (ANSI MH10.8M)
Width and narrowness 2.5:1
Reagent refrigeration
Reagent Refrigeration Temperature: 2~12°C
Reagent addition approach

Reagent is aspirated and dispensed precisely by syringe, which is capable of detecting
fluid level and checking reagent volume.
Supported reagent types

R1, R2.
Reagent Vol
R1 volume 100μl~250μl, with an increment of 0.5μl; R2 volume 10μl~250μl, with an
increment of 0.5μl.

Reagent carousel
The sample and the reagent share a carousel, and the reagents can be set in the middle
ring or the inner ring. The positions of middle ring reagents support built-in reagent bar
code reader.
Number and volume of reagent bottle

The reagent positions support Mindray reagent bottles, which include: outer ring 40ml,
middle ring 20ml, and inner ring 20ml.
Reagent carousel reagent quantity

The middle ring supports 40ml and 20ml reagent bottles, and the inner ring supports
20ml reagent bottles. When a radial position of the middle ring has been loaded with a
40ml reagent bottle, the inner ring is forbidden to be loaded with a 20ml reagent bottle.
Reagent probe
The sample and the reagent share one probe, featuring level detection (vertical collision
detection) and level tracking.
Reagent probe cleaning

Both interior and exterior of the sample probe are washed.
Prevention of reagent cross contamination

Users are allowed to perform carryover settings, e.g. washing interior and exterior of
reagent probes and inserting special wash between tests.
2.1.4 Specifications of Reaction System
Optical pathlength of reaction cuvette

Light pathlength 5mm
Material of reaction cuvette

5mm×5mm×29.5mm, plastic cuvette; cuvette segment structure, each segment containing
5 cuvettes
Number of reaction cuvettes

40
Mixing method
Mix after the sample and R2 are added.
Reaction volume
100~360μl

Optical measurement method

Forward splitting filter system, detecting each wavelength through a photodiode
Wavelength
8 wavelengths: 340nm, 405nm, 450nm, 510nm, 546nm, 578nm, 630nm, 670nm
Light source
12V/20W tungsten-halogen lamp
Wavelength accuracy
±2nm
Photometric measurement method

Measuring through a photodiode
Number of wavelengths simultaneously measured for each test

Supporting one or two wavelengths
Absorbance range
0-4.0A, optical path: 10mm
Resolution of photometer
0.0001OD
2.1.5 Specifications of Operation Unit
Display monitor
Screen resolution of 1280×1024
Operating system
Supporting Window 8 (64 bit)
Communication Interfaces
RS232, compatible with TCP/IP.
Printer
Supporting three types of printer: inkjet printer, laser (black and white) printer and
stylus printer.
Data input
Keyboard; mouse; bar code reader; LIS: HL7, ASTM1394 (communicating through the
TCP/IP or serial interface of static IP address)

Data output
Display monitor, printer, RMS (communicating through TCP/IP interface of static IP
address), and LIS.
Data storage
Hard disk and USB interface.
2.1.6 Typical Test Procedure

Figure 2.1 Test flowchart
Wait for Mixer

Add R2
steadiness of performs
Double Reagent to probe
Complete absorbency measurement

lamp and mixing
Chemistries
Startup Initialization Procedure
balance of
Mixer performs mixing
reaction
Shutdown Procedure
Add sample to probe
Available
carousel
Add R1 to probe
chemistries are
Wash Cuvette
Wash Cuvette
temperature finished
Single Reagent
Chemistries
Next test
2.1.7 Startup Procedure

1 The analyzer is powered on.
2 The operating software is run and starts checking the running environment.
3 Check the middle-low layer units status.
4 The software checks the parameters and status of the analyzer, and inquires the key
parameters and status of all units.
5 If a bar code reader is configured, its handshake is performed.
6 Fluidic initialization is performed.
7 Mechanical reset is performed.
8 The reaction carousel temperature control is turned on.
9 The lamp is turned off and the dark current and maximum luminance value of the
reaction carousel lamp are inquired. The lamp is turned on (it takes 5 minutes for the
lamp to become steady. When 5 minutes are not reached and the system finishes its
home procedure, the system enters incubation status). If the lamp has been turned
on, neither turn off the lamp nor query the dark current.
10 System reset is executed.
11 Clean special exterior of the sample probe.
12 Turn on the cuvette cleaning water, preheat the wash solution, and preheat the
reagent.

13 The reagent bar code is scanned (when the reagent bar code reader is configured.)
14 The ISE module stats initialization (only if an ISE module is configured.)
15 If the conditions for system standby are met, the system enters into Standby status.
2.1.8 Shutdown Procedure

1 When the system is in the Standby status, the shutdown procedure can be performed.
2 Turn off the lamp; turn off the reaction cuvette temperature control, cuvette cleaning
water and wash solution preheating and reagent preheating.
3 Pumps and valves are powered off for resetting.
4 Execute MANT periods of the ISE for 10 times, and discharge the waste in the ISE
tube into the reagent pack (only if the ISE module is configured).
5 The database is shut down. If the operation fails, the system gives a warning, and
continues the shutdown after confirmation.
6 The system exits.
2.1.9 Workflow Descriptions
Sequential actions of sample probe in each period (adding sample for

biochemistry test and R1)
Wash ->Rotate to sample carousel->lower to sample tube->aspirate sample->raise to
“home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel-> lower into the reaction
carousel -> dispense sample-> raise to “home” position vertically -> rotate to wash well -
>wash->Rotate to reagent carousel->lower to reagent bottle->aspirate R1-> raise to
“home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel-> lower into the reaction
carousel -> dispense R1 ->raise to “home” position vertically-> rotate to wash well.

ISE test)
Wash ->rotate to sample carousel->lower into the sample tube-> aspirate sample -> raise
to “home” position vertically -> rotate to top of ISE sample injection port -> lower to ISE
sample injection port -> dispense sample -> raise to “home” position vertically -> rotate to
wash well -> wash -> go to next period


whole blood test)
Wash ->rotate to sample carousel->lower to sample tube->aspirate sample->raise to
“home” position vertically -> rotate to wash well->lower to special wash position->wash
special outer wall-> raise to “home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel->
dispense sample ->raise to “home” position vertically-> rotate to wash well->wash->lower
to special wash position -> wash special outer wall->raise to “home” position vertically ->
go to next period.

R2 test)
Wash ->rotate to reagent carousel->lower into the reagent bottle-> aspirate R2 -> raise to
“home” position vertically -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower into the reaction
carousel -> dispense R2 -> raise to “home” position vertically-> rotate to wash well ->
wash-> go to next period.
Sequential actions of mixer in each period

Rotate to wash well -> lower to wash well -> wash -> raise to wash well -> rotate to
reaction carousel -> lower to reaction carousel -> mix -> raise to top of reaction carousel-
>go to next period.
Sequential actions of reaction carousel

18 seconds per period. Depending on the need of the dispense action of the sample probe,
stop 3 times after rotating 3 times, or stop 2 times after rotating 2 times.
2.1.10 Measuring Points

Figure 2.2 Measuring points for single-/double-reagent test
Set incubation
R1 R1 incubates for S MixS time of R2 R2 MixR2 Maximum reaction time of Reaction end
180s arbitrarily double reagent is over 10 min
T1 T11
Maximum reaction time of single reagent is over 20 min

3 Installation Requirements and Procedure

3.1 Check before Installation
3.1 Check before Installation
3.1.1 Installation Environment

 Altitude:-400~2,000m
 The system is for indoor use only.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (with gradient less than 1/200).
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to support at least 100Kg weight.
 The installation site should be well ventilated.
 The installation site should be free of dust.
 The installation side should not be in direct sun.
 The installation site should be kept away from a heat or draft source.
 The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
 The installation site should be kept away from large noise and power supply
interference.
 Keep the system away from brush-type motors and electrical contact device that is
frequently switched on and off.
 Do not use such devices as mobile phones and radio transmitter near the system.
 Ambient temperature: 15°C-30°C, with fluctuation less than 2°C/H during operation.
 Relative humidity: 35%-85%, without condensation.
 Provide air conditioning equipment if the room temperature does not meet the
requirements.
 Install the equipment near a sewer for convenient discharging of waste liquid.
 Dimensions before packing: 690mm(length)×580mm(depth)×595mm(height)
 Dimensions after packing: 825mm(length)×695mm(depth)×795mm(height)
3.1.2 Configuration Check

 BS-240 Chemistry Analyzer
 Packing list of accessory kit
 Packing list of ISE accessory kit (for ISE module only)

3.2 Installation Requirements
3.2.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation

Figure 3.1 System Clearance
Wall
Minimum 500
Maximum 3000
Minimum 500
Operation Unit
708
Analyzer
Minimum 500
1180
Front
Unit: mm
Minimum 500
3.2.2 Power Supply and Noise

 Power supply: 220V model: 220V-240V~50Hz, 220/230V~60Hz, 110/115V~ 60Hz;
voltage fluctuation: ±10%. Line frequency: ±3Hz. Three-wire power cord with good
grounding performance (ground voltage ≤ 5V).
 The instrument should be powered by a properly-grounded power supply no less
than 3000VA, and the mains socket used to connect the instrument should have its
load no less than 10A.
 Keep the instrument at least 2.5m away from the mains socket.
 If you are going to use a UPS to power the instrument, make sure that the UPS can
provide power supply greater than or equal to 3000VA/2100W.
WARNING
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Incorrect grounding may lead to
electric shock or equipment damage.
Measurement of ground voltage:
Set the multimeter to the AC 250V scale, connect the black probe to the earth wire and
the red probe to the live wire and neutral wire. If grounding is proper, the voltage
between earth wire and neutral wire should be less than 5V, and the voltage between
earth wire and live wire should be similar to that between live wire and neutral wire.
Check if the power socket outputs voltage meeting the specified requirements and has
a proper fuse installed.

3.2.3 Water Supply and Drainage

 Water quality: meeting requirements of CLSI type II with specific resistance no less
than 1 (MΩ.cm@25°C) and silicate less than 0.1mg/L.
 Water temperature: 5-32°C.
 Water is supplied to the instrument by using a deionized water tank that
accompanies the instrument, with a tank volume of 15L.
 The deionized water tank should be placed on the ground.
 Make the instrument discharge low-concentration waste to the sewer, or to the low-
concentration waste tank.
 Low-concentration waste tube is shorter than 5m.
 Make sure that the low-concentration waste outlet is no less than 50mm wide.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of liquid waste according to the local regulations.
CAUTION
The supplied water must meet the requirements of CLSI type II; otherwise,
insufficiently purified water may result in misleading test results.

3.3 Computer Requirements(for International Customers)
3.3.1 CPU
At least Intel Dual Core, 2.6GHz
3.3.2 Memory
At least 2GB for each RAM
3.3.3 Network Adapter

The computer needs to be connected to an LIS or Internet network, and one network
adapter (Intel 1000M network adapter) needs to be added.
3.3.4 Serial Port

The computer should provide an RS232 serial port, which is used to connect it with the
analyzer.
3.3.5 Hard disk defragment

Install the operating system in the C drive and the operating software of the instrument in
the D drive. Make sure that the C drive is over 30G and D drive over 100G, and the disk file
system is of NTFS format. Deselect the two options at the bottom of the disk properties
window: “Compress drive to save disk space” and “Allow Indexing Service to index this
disk for fast file searching”.

Figure 3.2 Hard disk defragment
Operating System
Microsoft Window 8 (64 bit)
The default login user of the computer must belong to the Administrator group and has
permissions for administrator.
Application Software
Except for the operating system, other application software must not be installed or
reserved on the computer. If the anti-virus application has been installed, then remove
the automatic scheduled scanning and add BS-240 (Workstation) and BSLOG to the trust
list.
3.3.6 Remove Screen Saver and System Standby

To remove the screen saver and system standby, select None in the Screen saver pull-
down list box of the Screen Saver Settings window, and then select Change power settings
-> Change plan settings to go to the Edit plan settings window. Perform the settings as
shown in the figures below.

Figure 3.3 Remove screen saver
Figure 3.4 Standby settings 1
Select None in the Turn off the display and Put the computer to sleep pull-down list boxes.
Figure 3.5 Standby settings 2
3.3.7 Screen Display Properties

Set the screen resolution as 1280*1024 pixels and color quality as Highest (32 bit).

Disable Automatic Synchronization with Internet Time Server

Double click the time icon on the lower-right corner of the task bar. The Date and Time
Properties window is displayed.
Figure 3.6 Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server - 1
Select the Internet Time tab, and then deselect the checkbox in front of Synchronize with
an Internet time server.
Figure 3.7 Disable automatic synchronization with Internet time server - 2
Turn off automatic updates

Turn off the automatic updates on the Windows Update window.

Figure 3.8 Turn off automatic updates

3.4 Installation Procedure
3.4.1 Unpacking
1 Before unpacking, check the packing list and see if the following items are included:
chemistry analyzer, accessory kit, deionized water tank, dilution wash solution tank,
high-concentration waste tank, low-concentration waste tank, wash solution, and ISE
module (accessory kit, optional).
2 The chemistry analyzer is about 100kg. Unload it from the truck with a forklift.
3 Use a utility knife and an adjustable wrench to unpack, and remove the bracket and
screws.
4 Move the instrument into position.
3.4.2 Installation
Taking out Sample Probe and Reagent Probes

Remove the packaging material and plastics on the analyzer panels. Take out the sample
probe from the accessory kit and insert them into the corresponding metal connectors.
Note not to forget the white washers in the package.
Figure 3.9 Install white washer

Installing Probes
Figure 3.10 Installation procedure of probes
Keep the
Washer washer
steady
Retaining screw
and spring Earthing
wire
Fluid level
sense board
connector
1 Before installing the probe, remove the probe arm cover by loosen the screws on it.
2 Insert the probe downwards into the hole on the probe arm while aligning the screw
hole on the probe plate to the rod inside the arm.
3 Install the washer in the tube connector. To replace the washer, remove the old one
from the tube connector and install the new one. Connect the tube connector to the
probe and then tighten it.
4 Fix the earthing wire of the probe to the earthing terminal inside the arm; connect
the probe connector to the fluid level detection board.
5 Sleeve the spring on the rod and tighten the retaining screw. Pay attention to the
spring direction and make the thread opening face downwards.
6 Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the probe upwards and then
release it to check if the spring works well. If it does, proceed to the next step. If not,
check if the spring is clamped or fixed too tightly.
7 After installation, power on the chemistry analyzer, and then check if the No.D2 LED
indicator on the circuit board inside the probe arm is lit. If it is, it indicates that the
level detection system works normally.
8 Install the arm cover and tighten the screws on it.

9 Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the probe upwards and then
release it to check if the spring works well. If it does, proceed to the next step. It not,
it indicates that the arm cover is not installed correctly. Reinstall the arm cover and
check the spring until it can move freely.
Installing Mixers
1 Take out the mixer from the accessory kit and lift the mixer arm to the vertical
extreme.
Figure 3.11 Take out mixers
2 Screw the mixer into the large hole of the retaining screw till it is level with the small
hole end.
Figure 3.12 Mixer
3 Insert the mixer motor shaft into the mounting hole and make sure they contact
tightly and there is no gap in the vertical direction.
4 Tighten the fixing screws of the mixer clockwise and check whether the mixer is
perpendicular. If not, reinstall the mixer.
Figure 3.13 Tighten the retaining nut and check if the mixer is vertical

3.4.3 Fluidic Connection

1 The deionized water tank is filled with deionized water.
2 Prepare the dilution wash solution at a proportion of 1:9 (1 portion of concentrated
wash solution to 9 portions of deionized water), and fill the dilution wash solution
tank with the dilution wash solution.
3 Use the deionized water tank connectors, dilution wash solution tank connectors,
and waste tank connectors in the accessory kit to connect the tank to the deionized
water inlet, the dilution wash solution inlet, the low-concentration waste outlet, and
the high-concentrated waste outlet on the right side of the instrument.
3.4.4 Connection of Analyzer

1 If you are using an UPS, install it and make it properly grounded.
2 Connect the analyzer, computer, printer, display monitor, power cord and data cable.
Do not switch on the power before finishing all connections.
3 Connect the computer with the analyzer with the serial port cable, and choose the
COM1 port for the computer.
3.4.5 Startup
1 Turn on the main power switch and the analyzer power switch.
2 Start the computer. The BS-240.exe operating software is run automatically when
the Windows is started. You are also allowed to run the operating software by
selecting the shortcut icon on the desktop or in the Start menu. See the figure below.
The system skips the initialization procedure when detecting that the fluidic prime is
not performed. Enter the username “ServiceUser” and password “#BS8A#SEU” in
the login window.

Figure 3.14 Startup screen
Figure 3.15 "Login" Screen
3 When the main screen is shown, select Utility -> System Setup -> Factory. Select
"Optional Modules", and enable the ISE module, sample bar code and reagent bar code,
and then select Save. See the figure below:

Figure 3.16 "Optional Modules" window
3.4.6 Fluidic Prime

1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Hydro Unit. The screen is displayed as
follows.
Figure 3.17 "Hydro Unit" screen
2 Select 3 Fluidic Prime to display the following window. The check of solenoid valve,
level floater and pump and syringe has been finished by default. Click "Continue".
Follow the screen instructions, remove the cuvette wash station and put it in an
opening container to finish syringe priming, and then install the wash station back.

3 Complete cleaning and priming of inner and outer walls of the sample probe and the
mixer.
4 The fluidic prime is finished.
3.4.7 Initial Maintenance Record

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance to display the maintenance window. Confirm
all scheduled maintenance procedures and set up start time for them. The maintenance
frequencies include Daily, Weekly, Two-Week, Monthly, Three-Month, Six-Month, and
Other. Select the Select All button on each maintenance frequency tab page, and then
select OK. The current date and time appears in the Date Performed column of each
maintenance procedure as shown in the figure below.

Figure 3.18 Scheduled Maintenance screen
3.4.8 Startup Initialization

When the fluidic prime is finished, exit the operating software and reboot the computer.
The operating software is automatically run and starts initializing. When the login
window is displayed, enter the user name: "Admin" and password "Admin", as shown
below.
Figure 3.19 Startup screen

Figure 3.20 "Login" Screen
When the main screen is shown, select Reagent -> Reagent/Calibration, and then
perform ISE reagent loading.
3.4.9 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters of Mindray

Reagents
1 Select Utility -> Chemistries -> Config, and select Options to display the Option
window. Select Import to display the Import window.

Figure 3.21 Enter the "Import" window
2 Select Load Default to display all Mindray reagent chemistries in the left column.
Select Add All to add all chemistries to the right column. Select Exit to close the
window.

Figure 3.22 "Import" window
3 All Mindray reagent chemistries are displayed in the "Available Chemistries" column.
You can delete chemistries that will not be used in your laboratory.
Figure 3.23 "Chemistry Configuration" screen

4 Select OK to complete the chemistry configuration.
Figure 3.24 Complete chemistry configuration
3.4.10 System Performance Test
Water Test
1 Perform the following checks before starting test:
 All components' mechanical movement is correct without abnormal alarms (of
optics, temperature control, mechanics, communication, etc.).
 Probes are washed normally without hanging liquid.
 When lowering to cuvette bottom, the wash station is lifted
 The reaction curve of all samples has no periodical fluctuation or sharp jumps,
and the absolute value of test results is no greater than 10.
2 Chemistry Setup
Set a single-reagent chemistry "Water", with parameters including: endpoint,

positive reaction, primary wavelength 340nm, secondary wavelength 405nm, result
unit U/L, decimal places of result 0.01, blank time (-9)-(-7), incubation time 0,
reaction time (13)-(22), sample volume 10, reagent volume R1:100.
3 On the Calibration Setup window, select the chemistry "Water", specify the K factor
math model with K factor 10000, select Save and exit the window.

4 Load the reagent.

5 Preparation for Analysis
 Load deionized water as R1 (each more than 10ml).
 Place deionized water as 1 sample (each more than 2ml).
 Place concentrated wash solution in position 39 on the reagent carousel.
NOTE:
Wear gloves when loading the wash solution.
6 Starting Analysis
Program 1 sample with the chemistry "Water", with 40 replicates. Start the test and
observe the working status of the parts. If an alarm is given, troubleshoot the error.

3.5 Stop Use
3.5 Stop Use
3.5.1 Stop Use for Short Term
When to do
Stop use for short term (within 3 days)
How to do
1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Fluidic Emptying Unit.
2 Empty the fluidic tubes according to the software prompts.
3 If the ISE module is configured, select Empty ISE Tube to empty the ISE tubes
according to the software prompts. Remove the ISE electrodes and inject proper
amount of Calibrator A into the Na, K and Cl electrodes with a pipettor, and use tape
to seal the electrodes before storing them. As regards the reference electrode, insert a
soft tube into it.
4 Exit the operating software, shut down the computer and power off the analyzer.
5 If the analyzer is to be stored in another place, disconnect the data cables among the
analyzing unit, computer, monitor, and disconnect the tubes in the back of the
analyzer following the reversed order in Section 3.4.3.
3.5.2 Stop Use for Long Term
When to do
Stop use for long term (more than 3 days or for several years)
How to do
1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Fluidic Emptying Unit;
2 Empty the fluidic tubes according to the software prompts.
3 If the ISE module is configured, select Empty ISE Tube to empty the ISE tubes
according to the software prompts. Remove the ISE electrodes and inject proper
amount of Calibrator A into the Na, K and Cl electrodes with a pipettor, and use tape
to seal the electrodes before storing them. As regards the reference electrode, insert a
soft tube into it.
4 Exit the operating software, shut down the computer and power off the analyzer.
5 Follow the reversed order in 3.4.4 Connection of Analyzer to disconnect the analyzer
and follow the reversed order in 3.4.3 to disconnect the tubes in the back of the
analyzer.

3.5 Stop Use
6 Follow the reversed order in 3.4.2 Installation to restore the analyzer, and place the
probes and related parts into the accessory kit for storing.
7 Follow the reversed order of unpacking in 3.4.1 Unpacking to push the main
analyzing unit into the packing box for packing.

4 Software Introduction

4.1 Software Installation
4.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package

The installation package of the operating software contains three folders: Setup,
SetupGuide, and Thirdparty.
Figure 4.1 Folders in operating software installation package
Setup folder: includes the operating software installation file (setup.exe) and the KillBsLog
tool that can end the Bslog service.
Figure 4.2 Setup folder
KillBslog: a service run automatically when the operating software is started, and used to
record the logs of the software. When started, the software checks if the service is started,
and if it is not started, the software gives an alarm indicating startup failure. When logging
on the software, you are allowed to end this process, and this action will not be recorded
in the logs.
SetupGuide folder: includes the software installation and upgrading guide.
Thirdparty folder: includes dotnetfx and SQLExp installation packages. The former
contains the installation program of Microsoft .net Framework and is the running
environment assembly of SQL;while the latter is database software.
4.1.2 Folder Structure

The default installation path of the operating software is: D:\Mindray\Workstation.

After installation, the folder structure is like the following:
Figure 4.3 Workstation folder
The OperationSoft folder is relatively important and expanded as follows:
Figure 4.4 OperationSoft folder
Important folders include:
 AbsData: stores reaction curve files.

 AlarmFile: stores alarm log messages.
 Database: database file, which contains all parameters, test results, calibration and QC
data, etc.
 ExceptionLog: records address segment for error analysis when the software
collapses abnormally. (Note: There are two ExceptLog files, and the other one is in
Instrument_1 folder.)
 Help: online help in .chm format.

 Instrument_1: log file of analyzer.

 Item: Mindray's chemistry parameter file.
 LOG: records software upgrading information. (last upgrading information record)
 Logs: RMS (Remote Management System) logs. Not used temporarily.
 Workstation.exe: shortcut of the BS-240 program.
4.1.3 Log Files

The BsLog process records in real-time mode the communication and action information
of the software and analyzer, which includes but not limited to the following:
 Keyboard input
 Error log, operation log and maintenance log of the software
 Communication instructions between the PC and analyzer
 Action instructions of the analyzer
 Floater and photocoupler statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
 Pump and valve powering statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
 Photoelectric data (real-time)
 ……
Separate log files are produced every day and stored in the following addresses:
1 WorkstationLOG folder at D:\Mindray\Workstation\OperationSoft.

2 InstrumentLOG folder at D:\Mindray\Workstation\OperationSoft\Instrument_1.
The folder structure is shown below:

Figure 4.5 InstrumentLOG folder
Important folders include:
 InstrService: water blank data.

 Lislog: LIS communication data.
 RPC: (short form of Remote Procedure Call) basic control command data.
 ISEAdapterSrv: ISE command and test data.
 Workdata: instrument working instructions record
4.1.4 Normal Startup Procedure

The normal startup procedure of the operating software is as follows:
1 The system checks if the Bslog process has been started automatically. If not, the
Bslog.exe program is run.
2 Sqlserver is started, and it will exit if an error indicating database initialization failed
occurs.
3 The software process is started.
4 Enter the username and password.
5 The software shakes hands with the middle-/lower-layer units. If handshake fails, an
alarm is given prompting the unit is abnormal.

4.2 Software Upgrading
4.2 Software Upgrading

Refer to the upgrading guide in the SetupGuide folder or in the
D:\Mindray\Workstation\UpgradeTool path.
Note: After upgrading the software, switch off the main power and switch it on again to
refresh the refrigeration unit.

4.3 Software Uninstallation
4.3 Software Uninstallation
4.3.1 Uninstalling BS-240 Software

1 End the BSlog process by using the KillBslog tool in the installation package.
2 Find the WorkStation program on the Control Panel window and uninstall it.
4.3.2 Uninstalling SQL Database

Find the SQL Server program on the Control Panel window and uninstall it.

4.4 Database Backup and Restoration
4.4 Database Backup and Restoration
4.4.1 Database Backup

To back up a database, exit the operation software first, and then copy the BA80.bak file
at D:\Mindray\Workstation\OperationSoft\ Database\Backup to a database file backup
location of a local disk.
4.4.2 Database Restoration

To restore a database, find a location of the to-be-restored database in the local disk first,
and then copy the database file to D:\Mindray\Workstation\OperationSoft\
Database\Backup.

4.5 Demo Software Setup

To set the operation software to a Demo mode, exit the operation software first, and then
add a command line in the WorkStation.exe startup program. Specifically, change the
name WorkStation of the WorkStation.exe startup program to WorkStation -Demo -
MCUDemo –ISEDemo, and then start the operation software so that the software enters a
Demo mode.


5 Modules and Units

5 Modules and Units
5.1 Shell Assembly
5.1 Shell Assembly
5.1.1 Main functions

The shells assembly indicates the apparent structures of the whole analyzer and is
designed for preventing dust and protecting the internal assemblies. It provides
interfaces for each module, and is also a representation of industrial design.
5.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details

The shells assembly consists of the shielding cover, top cover, left and right panel
assemblies, front cover assembly, panel, middle baffle, and rear panel.
Figure 5.1 BS-240 shell assembly (1)
Shielding cover hinge

assembly
Syringe cover assembly
Auto wash tube sleeve
Shielding cover Wash station desk panel

assembly
Air spring holder
Middle baffle (BA24)
Reaction carousel panel

Air spring
assembly (BA24)
ISE port plug for panel Lamp panel
Sample/reagent panel Screw plug for panel

Front cover
Sample/reagent carousel
assembly (BA24)
cover assembly
Left panel assembly

5 Modules and Units
5.1 Shell Assembly
Figure 5.2 BS-240 shell assembly (2)
Top cover
Rear panel
Right panel assembly
Table 5.1 List of materials
No FRU No. or Part Part Name Remark

No.
1 115-036569-00 Shielding cover assembly FRU
2 042-016861-00 Middle baffle (BA24) FRU(BS-240)
3 042-016862-00 Middle baffle (BA25) FRU(BS-230)
4 M6T-010005--- Air spring FRU
5 BA40-20-72908 ISE port plug for panel /
6 043-006892-00 Sample/reagent panel FRU
7 115-036339-00 Sample/reagent carousel cover assembly FRU
8 115-036338-00 Left panel assembly FRU
9 115-036337-00 Front cover assembly (BA24) FRU(BS-240)
10 115-036334-00 Front cover assembly (BA25) FRU(BS-230)
11 BA40-20-72907 Screw plug for panel (Mould MR72907) FRU
12 043-006894-00 Lamp panel FRU
13 115-036340-00 Reaction carousel panel assembly (BA24) FRU(BS-240)
14 115-036335-00 Reaction carousel panel assembly (BA25) FRU(BS-230)
15 042-018183-00 Air spring holder /
16 043-006896-00 Wash station desk panel FRU(BS-240)
17 043-006897-00 Wash tube sleeve /(BS-240)
18 BA10-30-78156 Syringe skylight cover assembly FRU
19 BA10-20-77801 Top cover FRU
20 115-036570-00 Right panel assembly FRU
21 042-016863-00 Rear panel /

5 Modules and Units
5.1 Shell Assembly
5.1.3 Replacing sheilding cover
When to do
Replace the shielding cover when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross head screwdriver / 1
Flathead screwdriver(small) / 1
How to do
1 Cut off the power of the analyzer to ensure all the assemblies are not in the work
status.
2 Open the shielding cover assembly, insert a flathead screwdriver into a gap between
the circlip and the round head on the air spring head on a side of the shielding cover,
and push outward the circlip to a limit of not dropping the circlip.
3 Hold the shielding cover body, and take out the air spring from the round head with a
slight force, and then put the circlip back into the original position.
4 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the 4 M4×10 powder screws that fasten the hinge
assembly of the shielding cover to the shielding cover assembly, so as to remove the
shielding cover assembly.
5 To restore the shielding cover assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in the
reversed order.
Alignment and confirmation

After restoring the shielding cover assembly, check the gap with the panels, and if the gap
is uneven or the shielding cover interferes with the panels, adjust the position of
fastening the hinges (the screw holes are rectangular holes that allow adjustment).
5.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Left and Right Panels
When to do
This operation is performed when an inner component of the instrument needs repair
and the left and right panels need to be removed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

5 Modules and Units
5.1 Shell Assembly
How to do
1 Remove the 3 screws at the back of the left panel or right panel.
2 Use one hand to hold the side panel, and use the other hand to exert a slight force of
beating from the side panel arc on the upper part of the bench to the back of the
instrument to push the side panel to move until the 2 stop bolts on the front end of
the side panel are fully removed from the front cover bracket, and then remove the
side panel.
3 To reinstall the side panel, follow the steps mentioned above in a reverse order.

The left and right panel needs to fit the top panel exactly. Otherwise, the rear side cannot
fit the frame closely, which affects fastening of the screw.
5.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Front Panel
When to do
and the front panel need to be removed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
How to do
1 Remove the left panel and the right panel first.
2 Loosen the 2 screws (without removing) in the front of the sample/reagent panel,
and then remove the lamp panel.
3 Loosen (without removing) a retaining screw of the front panel and the front beam
of the frame to the maximum extent.
4 Remove the retaining screws located on both sides of the front panels and used for
fastening to the frame.
5 Pull out the panel assembly towards the front of the instrument.
6 To restore the front panel assembly, follow the steps mentioned above in the
reversed order.

When restoring, if the gap between the front panel and the sample/reagent panel and the
lamp panel is not proper, you can remove the lamp panel, and adjust the gap by adjusting
the retaining screw that fastens the front panel and the frame beam.

5 Modules and Units
5.1 Shell Assembly
5.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Panels
When to do
and the front panel need to be removed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
How to do
Removing and Reinstalling BS-240 Reaction Carousel Panel

1 Remove the panel screws on the wash station panel, the reaction carousel panel, the
lamp panel first, unscrew the retaining screws on the 3 parts, and remove the wash
station panel and the lamp panel.
2 Loosen the knurled screws on the wash probe assembly, and remove the wash probe
assembly. Handle carefully to protect the probe assembly against bending and
contamination.
3 Remove the probe arm cover and the mixer arm cover.
4 Remove the reaction carousel panel assembly. Note that the panel needs to tilt at a
specific angle so that it can be taken out. Handle carefully to protect the sampe probe
and the mixer.
5 To restore the reaction carousel panel assembly, follow the steps mentioned above
in the reversed order.
Removing/Reinstalling Sample/Reagent disk panel

1 Remove the panel screws on the reaction carousel panel and the lamp panel, and
unscrew the retaining screw.
2 Remove the sample/reagent carousel cover assembly from the sample/reagent
carousel panel.
3 Remove the sample/reagent panel.
4 To restore the reaction carousel panel assembly, follow the steps mentioned above

To restore the reaction carousel panel, adjust the gap evenly before tightening the screw.

5 Modules and Units
5.1 Shell Assembly
5.1.7 Replacing Air Spring
When to do
Replace the air spring if it loses elasticity or fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead screwdriver(small) / 1
How to do
1 Open the shielding cover, insert a flathead screwdriver into a gap between the circlip
and the round head on the air spring head, and push outward the circlip to a limit of
not dropping the circlip.
2 Grasp the air spring cylinder with a hand, and pull the air spring out. The
undamaged air spring head is still usable.
3 Install a new air spring (only the air spring cylinder needs to be replaced).

The cylinder end of the air spring needs to located at the side of the shielding cover. After
the air spring is replaced, open and close the shielding cover repeatedly for several times
so that the air spring cylinder is sufficiently lubricated.
5.1.8 Cleaning Fans
When to do
When much dust is accumulated on the fans, or it has been 1 year since the last
maintenance.
Maintenance Tools
Name Code Quantity
Suction cleaner or Hair brush / 1
Maintenance Procedure
1 Place the analyzing unit power to the OFF position.
2 If the reagent refrigeration fan and PCB fan need cleaning, remove the left panel
assembly.
3 If the system radiating fan and the power supply radiating fan need cleaning, remove
the rear panel.
4 If the lamp fan needs cleaning, remove the right panel assembly.

5 Modules and Units
5.1 Shell Assembly
5 Manually rotate the fan and remove the dust on it.

6 Install the removed panels.
7 Turn on the analyzing unit.

Check if the fans work normally.

5 Modules and Units
5.2 Frame Assembly
5.2 Frame Assembly

The frame assembly is a basic unit for installing and supporting the components of the
analyzer.
Figure 5.3 Locations of components on the instrument

Sample Probe Movement Assembly Mixer Movement Assembly
Shielding Cover Warning
Sample/reagent carousel cover

Wash station desk
Sample/reagent panel panel
Reagent bar code Reaction

assembly carousel panel
Lamp panel
Frame
Assembly
Reaction Carousel
Assembly
Sample/reagent
Left panel assembly
carousel assembly
Front cover assembly
board and the bracket

5 Modules and Units
5.2 Frame Assembly
5.2.2 Component Locations and FRU Details

Figure 5.4 Frame assembly
Dust screen
retaining screw
BA24 rear dust screen
BA24 front dust screen
Dust screen retaining screw
No FRU No. or Part No. Part Name Remark

1 048-006111-00 BA24 front dust screen FRU
2 048-006112-00 BA24 rear dust screen FRU
5.2.3 Replacing Front and Rear Dust Screens
When to do
The front and rear dust screens need to be replaced when they need cleaning or are
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

5 Modules and Units
5.2 Frame Assembly
Exploded view for installation

See the schematic diagram of the frame assembly.
How to do
1 Switch off the power supply of the whole unit.
2 Remove the right panel assembly.
3 Use a cross head screwdriver to loosen the dust screen retaining screw M3×10 and
cross recessed pan head screw.
4 Remove the dust screens.
5 Replace or clean the dust screens.
6 Restore the assembly in the reversed order.

Make sure that the dust screen completely covers the air inlet.

5 Modules and Units
5.3 Reaction Carousel Assembly

Reaction carousel assembly is situated at the right front side of the analyzer, including the
body of the reaction carousel, reaction carousel drive assembly, reaction carousel
chamber, reaction carousel sensor, and the reaction carousel motor assembly. It is used
to complete various actions, such as carrying and rotating the reaction cuvette to the
specified position, adding sample/reagent to the cuvette, mixing and washing, together
with the sample probe, the mixer and the 4-phase wash probes. It, as well as, provides a
constant temperature for the reaction cuvette for analysis.
Figure 5.5 Locations of assemblies on the instrument
Sample Probe Movement Mixer Movement

Assembly Assembly
Shielding Cover Warning
Sample/reagent
carousel cover Wash station desk panel
Sample/reagent panel
Reagent bar code Reaction carousel panel

assembly
Lamp panel
Frame Assembly
Reaction Carousel
Assembly
Left panel assembly
assembly
Front cover
assembly

5 Modules and Units
5.3.2 Locations and FRU details

The reaction carousel assembly is located in the right front side of the instrument.
Figure 5.6 Reaction carousel assembly
Upper cover assembly
Optical
assembly
Reaction carousel Sensor Reaction carousel heat

motor assembly assembly chamber assembly

5 Modules and Units
Temperature protection switch wire

Heater cable above (for reaction carousel)
reaction carousel
Cuvettes
Cover
Reaction Carousel
Body Assembly
M2.5×8 cross countersunk

head screw
M3× cross pan head
combination screw
Temperature control fan cable M5×20 hexagon screw
M3×14 cross recessed pan
head screw
Reaction carousel
temperature sensor
Stand bar of fan cable
Reaction chamber
Heater cable under

Thermal Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm
reaction carousel
M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw
Heater baffle plate

M4×8 cross pan head screw
Reaction carousel Reaction carousel support

motor assembly
Reaction Carousel Sensor Assembly

1 009-006306-00 Reaction carousel temperature FRU
sensor cable
2 115-006048-00 Motor assembly FRU
3 BA10-20-78144 Temperature control fan cable FRU
4 Heater cable under reaction FRU

BA10-21-78143
carousel
5 Heater cable above reaction FRU
BA10-21-78142
carousel
6 Temperature protection switch FRU
BA10-21-78147
wire (for reaction carousel)
7 009-002204-00 Correlative photocoupler (S) FRU
8 M6C-020007--- Synchronous cog belt, FRU
TBN180XL037

5 Modules and Units
5.3.3 Replacing Cables of Upper Cover Assembly
When to do
The temperature in the heat chamber of the reaction carousel is abnormal, and it is
checked that the heater cable on the reaction carousel or the temperature protection
switch cable of the reaction carousel is faulty. In this case, the faulty part needs to be
replaced.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Figure 5.7 Upper cover assembly cables
M4×8 cross
countersunk head
screw
Reaction carousel anchor plate
Temperature protection switch

wire (for reaction carousel)
Heater cable above

reaction carousel
Cover
How to do
1 Switch off the power of the analyzer.
2 Open the shielding cover, loosen the knurled screws on the wash probe assembly,
remove the wash probe assembly, and place the probe properly against bending.
Remote the sample probe to the reagent aspirating port position, remote the mixer
to the wash well position, unscrew the M4×8 cross recessed pan head padded screw,
remove the BA24 reaction carousel panel, lamp panel, wash panel, unscrew the 3
M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws for fastening the right panel assembly, and
remove the right panel assembly.

5 Modules and Units
3 Use a cross head screwdriver to unscrew the 4 M4×12 cross recessed combination
screws that fasten the upper cover assembly, unplug the heater connection cable on
the reaction carousel and the temperature protection switch cable of the reaction
carousel, and remove the upper cover assembly.
4 Unscrew the 4 M4×8 cross pan head combination screws that fasten the anchor
plate of the reaction carousel, and remove the anchor plate of the reaction carousel.
5 Remove the faulty heater cable on the reaction carousel or the faulty temperature
protection switch cable of the reaction carousel.
6 To replace the heater cable on the reaction carousel, apply thermal paste evenly on
the heater cable of the reaction carousel, and apply a small amount of hot melt
adhesive at the outlet of the heater cable on the reaction carousel to fasten the lead-
out cable.
7 To replace the temperature protection switch cable of the reaction carousel, apply
thermal paste evenly in the installation slot on the panel, and apply a small amount
of hot melt adhesive at the outlet of the temperature protection switch cable of the
reaction carousel to fasten the lead-out cable.
8 Restore the components in the reversed order.

After replacing the heater cable on the reaction carousel or the temperature protection
switch cable of the reaction carousel, configure the sensor-related parameters on
software, and perform the heat insulation performance test. For sensor parameter
configuration, see 8.10.1; for reaction carousel temperature test, see 8.10.2; for reaction
carousel temperature curve, see 8.10.2.
5.3.4 Replacing Heat Chamber Assembly Cables
When to do
The temperature in the heat chamber of the reaction carousel is abnormal, and it is
checked that the heater cable under the reaction carousel, or the Thermal Guard 60C
2Lead15.6mm, or the temperature sensor cable, or the temperature control chamber fan
cable is faulty. In this case, the faulty part needs to be replaced.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.8 Assembling/disassembling heat chamber assembly cable of reaction carousel
Upper cover assembly M2.5×8 cross countersunk head screw
M3×6 cross pan head combination screw
Temperature control fan cable Reaction carousel temperature sensor cable
Stand bar of fan

M5×20 hexagon screw
Reaction chamber
Heater cable under

Thermal Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm
reaction carousel

Heater baffle plate
Reaction carousel support
How to do
M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws for fastening the right panel assembly, and
remove the right panel assembly.
carousel, and remove the upper cover assembly and place it properly

5 Modules and Units
4 Disassemble the BS-240 reaction carousel assembly: Loose the anchor plate of the
reaction cuvette, remove the reaction cuvette segment, and place them properly.
Loosen the 3 M3×12 hexagon screws that fasten the reaction carousel assembly, and
remove the reaction carousel assembly, as shown in the following diagram:
Figure 5.9 Assembling/disassembling reaction carousel assembly
Reaction cuvette Reaction cuvette

segment anchor plate Fan and Reaction carousel
bracket temperature sensor cable
M3×12 hexagon screw Reaction Carousel Body Assembly
5 To replace the temperature sensor cable of the reaction carousel, use a cross head
screwdriver to loosen the M3×8 cross countersunk head screw, unplug the
temperature sensor cable of the reaction carousel, remove the temperature sensor
cable of the reaction carousel directly, and replace it with a new temperature sensor
cable of the reaction carousel and plug it properly.
6 To replace the heat chamber fan cable, unplug the heat chamber fan cable, use a
cross head screwdriver to unscrew 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head combination
screws, remove the stand bar of the fan together with the fan, and install a new fan
onto the stand bar and plug it properly. (Note: When installing the fan, please make
sure that the label faces the stand bar, and the cable of the fan is led out from the
lower right side)
7 To change the heater cable under the reaction carousel or the Thermal Guard 60C
2Lead15.6mm, remove 1 M4×12 screw and two M4×16 hexagon screws that fasten
the optical assembly, unplug the cable that connects the motor and the sensor, loosen
the 3 M5X20 hexagon screws that fasten the reaction chamber, unplug the related
cables, and remove the reaction chamber.
8 To replace the Thermal Guard 60C 2Lead15.6mm, put the reaction chamber upside
down, and loosen the 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screws directly to perform
replacement.

5 Modules and Units
9 To replace the heater cable under the reaction carousel, loosen 10 M4×8 cross
recessed pan head combination screws that fasten the baffle plate of the heater,
remove the baffle plate of the heater, and replace the heater cable under the reaction
carousel. Apply thermal paste evenly on the heater cable under the heater of the
reaction carousel, and apply a small amount of hot melt adhesive at the outlet of the
heater cable under the reaction carousel to fasten the lead-out cable.
10 Restore the assembly in reserved order. Try to align the heat chamber with the rotor
of the reaction carousel when installing the heat chamber.

After replacing the heater cable under the reaction carousel, the Thermal Guard 60C
2Lead15.6mm, and the temperature sensor cable of the reaction carousel, reconfigure the
related sensor parameters on the software and perform the heat insulation performance
test. For sensor parameter configuration, see 8.10.1; for reaction carousel temperature
test, see 8.10.2; for reaction carousel temperature curve, see 8.10.2.
5.3.5 Replacing Cables of Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor
When to do
Replace the home position sensor or the coder sensor of the reaction carousel when they
fail.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 5.10 Replacing cables of home position sensor and coder sensor
M3×6 cross pan Home position

head screw with Coder sensor sensor
washer
Mounting plate
of sensor
Install sensor in left

screw hole of bracket
Sensor bracket M3×8 hexagon socket M3×6 cross recessed
head cap screw pan head screw

5 Modules and Units
NOTE:
Install the sensors according to the identifications on the cable connectors and the
instrument connectors: "RCD--PHO-C" for coder sensor and "RCD--PHO-O" for home
position sensor.
Do not tighten the sensor screws with excessive torque force, in order to avoid
damaging the sensors.
Make sure to install the home position sensor in the correct position.
How to do
Disassembling and assembling the coder sensor.

2 Unscrew 3 M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws that fasten the right panel
assembly, remove the right panel assembly, and then unscrew 2 M4×8 cross
recessed pan head combination screws that fasten the AD bracket assembly, and put
the AD bracket assembly aside (without removing the cable of the AD box).
3 Unplug the cable of the coder sensor.
4 Loosen the 2 M3×6 cross combination screws that fasten the mounting plate of the
sensor, and remove the coder sensor cable together with the mounting plate.
5 Loosen the 2 cross pan head screws on the coder sensor, and remove the coder
sensor from the mounting plate.
6 Fix the new coder sensor on the mounting plate using two M3×6 cross pan head
screws.
7 Use 2 M3×6 cross combination screws to attach the mounting plate of the sensor to
the bracket of the sensor, adjust the height of the mounting plate, make sure that the
coder lie in the middle of the coder sensor, and then tighten the screws of the
mounting plate.
8 Plug the cable of the coder sensor.
9 After aligning and checking the sensor assembly of the reaction carousel, restore the
assembly in the reversed order of steps 1~2.
Disassembling and assembling home position sensor

2 Unscrew 3 M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws that fasten the right panel
assembly, remove the right panel assembly, and then unscrew 2 M4×8 cross
recessed pan head combination screws that fasten the AD bracket assembly, and put
the AD bracket assembly aside (without removing the cable of the AD box).
3 Unplug the connectors of the reaction carousel home position sensor and coder
sensor.

5 Modules and Units
4 Unscrew the three M3X8 hexagon socket head cap screws with spring and flat
washers on the reaction carousel sensor assembly to remove it. Do not drop the
screws into the analyzer.
6 Unscrew 2 M3×6 cross pan head screws on the cables of carousel home sensor to
remove it from the bracket of the sensor.
7 Fix the new cables of carousel home sensor onto the sensor bracket using 2 M3×6
cross pan head screws.
8 Fix the reaction carousel sensor assembly on the large bottom plate using 3 M3×8
hexagon socket head cap screws with spring and flat washers. Rotate the reaction
carosuel with a hand, and prevent the zero position baffle plate of the coder from
interfering with the sensor.
9 Connect the home position sensor and the coder sensor.
10 After aligning and checking the sensor assembly of the reaction carousel, restore the
assembly in the reversed order of steps 1~2.

Align the photoelectric signal collecting position according to 8.3.1, and align the
circumferential position of the reaction carousel assembly, the circumferential position of
the sample/reagent carousel assembly, the horizontal position of the sample probe and
the mixer, and the horizontal position of the wash station according to 8.4.1~8.4.4.
5.3.6 Replacing Motor Assembly and Synchronous Belt
When to do
Replace the reaction carousel motor or synchronous belt when they are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.11 Reaction carousel motor assembly
M4×10 hexagon socket head

cap screw + spring washer
Motor
Motor shock pad
M5×12 hexagon
socket head cap screw
+ spring/flat washer
WARNING
During removing and installation, avoid dropping screws and washers into the analyzer.
How to do
Replace the motor

2 Unscrew 3 M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws that fasten the left panel assembly
and those that fasten the right panel assembly, remove the left and right panel
assemblies, unscrew M4×8 cross countersun head screws that fasten the front
housing of the BS-240, and remove the front housing of the BS-240.
3 Disconnect the motor cable, unscrew the 4 M5×12 hexagon socket head screws with
spring washer on the reaction carousel motor assembly, remove the motor assembly
and avoid dropping screws into the analyzer.
4 Fix a new motor assembly to the large bottom plate using 4 M5×12 hexagon socket
head cap screws with spring washer. Tighten the belt and screws and connect the
cable of the motor.
Replacing the synchronous belt


5 Modules and Units
M4×8 cross recessed pan head screws for fastening the left panel assembly and
those for fastening the right panel assembly, and remove the left and right panel
assemblies. Unscrew the M4×8 cross countersunk head screw that fastens the front
housing of the BS-240, and remove the front housing of the BS-240.
carousel, and remove the upper cover assembly and place it properly
4 Loose the anchor plate of the reaction cuvette, remove the reaction cuvette segment,
and place them properly. Loosen the 3 M3×12 hexagon screws that fasten the
reaction carousel assembly, and remove the reaction carousel assembly.
5 Remove 1 M4×12 screw and two M4×16 hexagon screws that fasten the optical
assembly, unplug the cable that connects the motor and the sensor, loosen the 3
M5X20 hexagon screws that fasten the reaction chamber, unplug the related cables,
and remove the reaction chamber.
6 Disconnect the motor cable, unscrew the 4 M5×12 hexagon socket head screws with
spring washer on the reaction carousel motor assembly, remove the motor assembly
and avoid dropping screws into the analyzer.
7 Install a new synchronous belt.
8 Fix a reaction carousel motor assembly to the large bottom plate using 4 M5×12
hexagon socket head cap screws with spring washer. Tighten the belt and screws
and connect the cable of the motor.
9 Restore the assembly in reserved order. Try to align the heat chamber with the rotor
of the reaction carousel when installing the heat chamber.

N/A
5.3.7 Replacing Reaction Cuvette

See 5.9.8 for the methods and steps of replacing reaction cuvette.

5 Modules and Units
5.4 Sample/reagent carousel assembly

The sample/reagent carousel assembly is situated at the left front of the analyzer, and
includes the sample/reagent carousel body assembly, sample/reagent refrigeration
assembly, sample/reagent carousel drive assembly, motor assembly, coder photocoupler
assembly, and bar code reader (optional). It is used to complete various actions, for
example, carry and rotate the reagent bottle with reagent and the sample container with
samples, so that the reagent/sample reach the specified position, add samples together
with sampling assembly. It provides a refrigerating environment, and the reagents stored
in such environment can be kept stable with little volatilization. For details, please refer to
the following contents.
1 Holding reagent/sample: Holding specified number of reagent bottles/sample

containers of certain specification, and cooperating with the dispenser to aspirate
reagent/sample from the bottles and dispense it into reaction cuvettes.
2 Refrigerating reagent: Provide 24-hour refrigeration and constant temperature
environment (2-10°C) to keep the reagent stable with little volatilization..
3 Sequential feeding: The drive assembly drives the reagent carousel to carry certain
reagent bottle in the given order to the aspirate position for aspiration.
4 Input reagent/sample data automatically: Bar code reader (optional).

5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.12 Locations of assemblies on the instrument
Shielding Cover

Wash station desk panel
Sample/reagent panel
Reagent bar code assembly Reaction carousel panel
Lamp panel
Frame Assembly
Reaction Carousel Assembly
Sample/reagent
Left panel assembly
carousel assembly
Front cover assembly
5.4.2 Assembly Locations and FRU Details

The sample/reagent carousel assembly is located in the front left of the instrument.
Figure 5.13 Sample/reagent carousel assembly

5 Modules and Units
11
10
9 2
3
4
5
6
8
7

No.
1 115-036341-00 Sample/reagent carousel body assembly FRU
2 024-000110-00 Sensor temperature 5Kohm B3470K with FRU
threads
3 082-000855-00 O-shaped 48.7X2.65 silicon rubber black A70 /
4 082-000856-00 O-shaped 65X2 silicon rubber black A70 /
5 BA40-21-61655 Semi-conductive Peltier cable FRU
7 115-036317-00 Sample/reagent carousel motor assembly FRU
8 M6C-020007--- Synchronous cog belt, TBN180XL037 FRU
9 BA10-20-78146 Cables of reagent refrigeration and radiating FRU
fan
10 115-036320-00 Reagent carousel anti-fogging heater FRU
assembly
11 023-000738-00 Built-in bar code reader MS-3 High density FRU
laser D-Sub
12 BA20-20-75214 Cuvette holder base 1 FRU
13 115-036342-00 Handle assembly FRU
14 BA30-20-15100 Rubber pad 1 FRU
15 BA30-20-15210 Transparent shield rubber pad FRU
16 041-022590-00 Sample tube adapter FRU

5 Modules and Units
5.4.3 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Body Assembly
When to do
Replace the sample/reagent carousel body assembly when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Rubber gloves for medical use / 1 pair

Figure 5.14 Reagent carousel body assembly
body assembly
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover, rotate the sample probe to the reaction carousel side, and
remove the sample/reagent carousel cover assembly.
3 Lift the handlebar to remove the sample/reagent carousel body assembly.
4 Align the locating holes on the new sample carousel body with the stop bolt, and
pinch the handlebar flat.
5 Restore the sample/reagent carousel cover, and close the shielding cover.

N/A

5 Modules and Units
5.4.4 Replacing Temperature Sensor
When to do
Replace the temperature sensor when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead screwdriver / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
Glue gun / 1

Figure 5.15 Disassembling/assembling temperature sensor
Sample/reagent
carousel body assembly
M3×10 cross countersunk

head screw
Refrigeration sleeve
M4×10 hexagon socket cap head screw
Rubber pad 1
Abrasion-resistant pad
Reagent refrigeration chamber
Rubber cushion
Temperature sensor
How to do

5 Modules and Units
2 Open the shielding cover, remove the sample/reagent carosuel cover, and remove the
left panel assembly, front cover assembly, lamp panel, reaction carosuel panel, wash
panel, and sample/reagent panel. Protect the sample probe from colliding during the
deatching.
4 Remove the reagent refrigeration board and bracket, disconnect the drain tube of
the reagent refrigeration compartment from the reagent refrigeration compartment,
remove the temperature sensor connector, and remove the reagent bar code
assembly if the bar code is configured.
5 Use a cross head screwdriver to remove 6 M3×10 cross countersunk head screws
that fasten the refrigeration sleeve, and remove the refrigeration sleeve and the
rubber pad 1.
6 Use the hexagon wrench to remove the 8 M4×10 hexagon socket head cap screws
that fasten the reagent refrigeration compartment, remove the abrasion-resistant
pad, and remove the reagent refrigeration compartment.
7 Clear the sealing glue in the installation position of the temperature sensor, and
remove the temperature sensor and the rubber pad.
8 Sheathe the rubber pad into a new temperature sensor, load them into the reagent
refrigeration compartment, and seal the installation hole with the sealing glue.
9 Apply thermal paste on the installation surface of the reagent refrigeration
compartment and the refrigeration aluminum block, apply the sealing glue on the
abrasion-resistant pad, and use 8 M4×10 hexagon socket head cap screws to install
the reagent refrigeration compartment onto the refrigeration aluminum block. Try
to align the reagent refrigeration compartment with the rotor.
10 Sheathe the rubber pad 1 into the refrigeration sleeve, apply the sealing glue to the
fitting surface of the reagent refrigeration compartment, and use 6 M3×6 cross
countersunk head screws to fix the refrigeration sleeve.
11 Install the disassembled parts in reversed order of steps 2~4.
NOTE
When filling the installation hole of the temperature sensor with the sealing glue,
completely fill the cable hole with glue. Wipe off overflowing glue when filling the
abrasion-resistant pad.

1 Re-align the sample probe to the positions of the outer ring sample tube and the
middle and inner ring reagent bottle (BA60-J07 pseudo probe, BA48-J10 sample
position alignment fixture, and BA10-J16 reagent center align with the alignment
fixture).

5 Modules and Units
2 Re-align the bar code scan position (light adjustment tool of BA24-J03 BA24 bar code
scan).
5.4.5 Replacing Peltier and Sealing Ring
When to do
Replace the Peltier when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross screwdriver / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
Glue gun / 1

Figure 5.16 Disassembling and assembling Peltier and sealing ring
Sample/reagent
carousel body
M3×10 cross countersunk
assembly
head screw
M4×10 hexagon socket cap

Refrigeration sleeve head screw
Rubber pad 1
Abrasion-resistant pad
chamber
Refrigeration aluminum block
M4×8 cross countersunk M4×8 cross countersunk

head screw head screw
O-shaped 48.7×2.65 sealing ring
Refrigeration aluminum block
M5×20 hexagon socket head cap
O-shaped 48.7×2.65 sealing ring
screws and spring/flat washer
Refrigeration fixing base Refrigeration fixing base
O-shaped 65×2 sealing ring O-shaped 65×2 sealing ring
Peltier Peltier

5 Modules and Units
How to do
deatching.
4 Remove the reagent refrigeration board and bracket, disconnect the drain tube of
the reagent refrigeration compartment from the reagent refrigeration compartment,
detach the temperature sensor connector, and detach the reagent bar code assembly
if the bar code is configured.
5 Use a cross screwdriver to remove 6 M3×10 cross countersunk head screws that
fasten the refrigeration sleeve, and remove the refrigeration sleeve and the rubber
pad 1.
that fasten the reagent refrigeration compartment, remove the abrasion-resistant
pad, and remove the reagent refrigeration compartment.
7 Remove the 2 M5×20 hexagon socket head cap screws, the elastomer and the flat
washer that are used to fasten the refrigeration base on the Peltier to be replaced,
and remove the refrigeration base that carry a refrigeration aluminum block, so that
the Peltier and the O-shaped 65×2 sealing ring can be replaced.
8 To replace the O-shaped 48.7×2.65 sealing ring, remove the 4 M4×8 cross
countersunk head screws that fasten the refrigeration aluminum block, and replace
the O-shaped 48.7×2.65 sealing ring.
9 Apply thermal pate on both sides of the substitute Peltier, install the Peltier
according to the direction before disassembling, and plug the cable. Install the
substitute sealing ring.
10 Use 4 M4×8 cross countersunk head screws to fix the refrigeration aluminum block
onto the refrigeration base, and then use 2 M5×20 hexagon socket head cap screws,
the elastomer and the flat washer to fix the refrigeration base onto the Peltier. The
direction needs to be consistent with the direction before disassembling.
11 Apply thermal paste on the installation surface of the reagent refrigeration
compartment and the refrigeration aluminum block, apply the sealing glue on the
abrasion-resistant pad, and use 8 M4×10 hexagon socket head cap screws to install
the reagent refrigeration compartment onto the refrigeration aluminum block. Try
to align the reagent refrigeration compartment with the rotor.

5 Modules and Units
NOTE
When filling the installation hole of the temperature sensor with the sealing glue,
completely fill the cable hole with glue. Wipe off overflowing glue when filling the
abrasion-resistant pad.

1 Re-align the sample probe to the positions of the outer ring sample tube and the
middle and inner ring reagent bottle (BA60-J07 pseudo probe, BA48-J10 sample
position alignment fixture, and BA10-J16 reagent center align with the alignment
fixture).
2 Re-align the bar code scan position (adjustment tool of the bar code scan light of
BA24-J03 BA24).
5.4.6 Replacing Cables of Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor
When to do
Replace the home position sensor or the coder sensor of the sample/reagent carousel
when they fail.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 5.17 Disassembling/assembling correlative photocoupler (S) cables
M3×6 cross pan head

screw with washer M3×6 cross recessed pan
head screw
Mounting plate of sensor

Coder photocoupler
M3×6 hexagon
socket cap head
screw M3×6 cross recessed pan
head screw

Photocoupler Home position

bracket photocoupler
How to do

5 Modules and Units
2 Remove the left panel assembly and the front panel assembly.
3 Remove the reagent refrigeration board and bracket, and unplug home position
photocoupler of the reagent carousel and the coder photocoupler.
4 Unscrew the 3 M3×6 hexagon socket head cap screws and the spring/flat washer
that are used to fasten the coder photocoupler assembly, and remove the coder
photocoupler assembly.
5 Loosen the 2 M3×6 cross pan head combination screws on the photocoupler
mounting plate, and then remove the photocoupler mounting plate together with the
coder photocoupler.
6 Loosen the 2 M3×6 cross pan head screws that fasten the coder photocoupler, and
remove the coder photocoupler from the sensor mounting plate.
7 Use 2 M3×6 cross pan head screws to fix the new coder photocoupler onto the
sensor mounting plate.
8 Use 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head combination screws to fix the sensor with the
coder photocoupler onto the photocoupler bracket, without tightening them.
9 Unscrew the 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screws of the photocoupler in the
home position of the reagent carousel, and remove the photocoupler from
photocoupler bracket.
10 Use 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screws to fix a new photocoupler cable in the
home position of the reagent carousel onto the photocoupler bracket
11 Use 3 M3×6 hexagon socket head cap screws to fix the coder photocoupler assembly
onto a large bottom plate, push the photocoupler bracket to a stop position of the
two hexagon screws, fit the bracket closely, and tighten the retaining screws. Adjust
the sensor mounting plate to make the coder lie in the middle of the coder
photocupler, and then tighten the screws on the mounting plate.
12 Plug the connectors of the photocoupler in the home position of the reagent carousel
and the coder photocoupler.
13 After aligning the position of the coder photocoupler assembly, restore the assembly
Note:
 To replace only the coder photocoupler, omit steps 9 and 10.

 To replace only the photocoupler in the home position of the reagent coupler, omit
steps 5 to 8.

After replacing the sensor and the coder sensor in the home position on the
sample/reagent carousel, refer to sections 8.4~8.5 to align the circumferential position of
the sample/reagent carousel assembly and align the horizontal position of the sample
probe on the sample/reagent carousel, and, if bar code is configured, align the bar code
scan position.

5 Modules and Units
5.4.7 Replacing Sample/Reagent Carousel Motor Assembly
When to do
Replace the motor when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
M3×20 hexagon socket head cap / 1

Figure 5.18 Disassembling and assembling sample/reagent carousel motor assembly
Synchronous belt
M3×20 hexagon socket cap
M4×10 hexagon socket head screw hole
head cap screws and
Sample/reagent carousel motor assembly
spring/flat washer
How to do
3 Unplug the motor cable, use a hand to check the tension of the synchronous belt and
keep a record.
and spring/flat washer that are used to fasten the sample/reagent carousel motor
assembly, and remove the assembly from the synchronous belt.

5 Modules and Units
5 Replace the assembly with a new sample/reagent carousel motor assembly, sheathe
the pulley of the assembly into the synchronous belt, and then tighten the M4×10
hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washer. Pay attention to the motor
direction.
6 Pass 1 M3×20 hexagon socket head cap screw with a washer (either spring or flat
washer, depending on requirements) through a tension hole, fasten the screw into
the motor mounting plate, strain the belt to the original status, and tighten the motor
assembly screw. Remove the M3×20 hexagon socket screw, and plug the motor cable.
7 Assemble and reset the front panel assembly and the left panel assembly.
NOTE
Make sure that the direction of the motor is correct.

N/A
5.4.8 Replacing the synchronous belt
When to do
Replace the belt when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Glue gun / 1
M3×20 hexagon socket head cap / 1

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.19 Disassembling/assembling synchronous belt
Sample/reagent
carousel body
assembly
M3×10 cross
Refrigeration sleeve
countersunk
head screw
Rubber pad 1
Rotor
Gap
Reagent
refrigeration
chamber
Synchronous
belt
M3×20 hexagon
screw hole
Sample/reagent
carousel motor Synchronous belt
assembly replacing space
M4×10 hexagon socket
cap head screw
How to do
deatching.
4 Remove the reagent refrigeration board and the bracket.
5 Use a cross screwdriver to remove 6 M3×10 cross countersunk head screws that
fasten the refrigeration sleeve, and remove the refrigeration sleeve and the rubber
pad 1.
6 Draw an aligned mark line on the motor mounting plate and the large bottom plate
(in the tension direction of the motor assembly to facilitate use after the
synchronous belt is replaced), loosen the 4 M4×10 hexagon socket head cap screws
that fasten the motor assembly of the sample/reagent carousel until the motor
assembly can move, without taking out the screws.
7 Remove the synchronous belt. If the belt is broken or can be cut off, remove the belt.
If the belt is not broken and needs to keep the current status, remove the belt from
the gap between the reagent refrigeration compartment and the rotor.

5 Modules and Units
8 Sheathe a new synchronous belt into the rotor, and feed the belt slowly into the gap
between the reagent refrigeration compartment and the rotor. At the belt replacing
operation space and at the motor end, sheathe the belt into the motor pulley and
rotor pulley.
9 Pass 1 M3×20 hexagon socket head cap screw with a washer (either spring or flat
washer, depending on requirements) through a tension hole, fasten the screw into
the motor mounting plate, strain the belt until it is aligned with the mark line drawn
before the motor mounting plate is loosened, and tighten the motor assembly screw.
Remove the M3×20 hexagon screw.
NOTE
Pass the synchronous belt through the gap between the reagent refrigeration
compartment and the rotor slowly, and avoid applying a large force.

N/A
5.4.9 Replacing Reagent Refrigeration and Radiating Fans
When to do
Replace the fan when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.20 Disassembling/assembling reagent refrigeration and radiating fans
M4×45 cross recessed

pan head screw and
flat washer
φ92 fan screen cover
Reagent refrigeration/radiating fan
How to do
3 Remove the connector of the fan that needs to be replaced.
4 Remove the 4 M4×45 cross recessed pan head screws and the flat washer of the fan
that needs to be replaced, and remove the fan screen and the fan.
5 Install a new fan. The installation direction of the fan needs to be consistent with the
original direction, and tidy the cable and the connector.
6 Install the front panel assembly and the left panel assembly.

After powering on the instrument, check that the cooling fan is blowing wind outwards,
5.4.10 Replacing Bar Code Reader
When to do
Replacing the bar code reader when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.21 Disassembling/assembling bar code reader
M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws

and spring washer and big flat washer Small bracket for bar code reader
Bar code reader
How to do
deatching.
3 Remove the connector of the bar code reader.
4 Remove the 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws, the spring washer, and the
big flat washer, and remove the bar code reader.
5 Install a new bar code reader into a small bracket mounting position of the bar code
reader. Pre-tighten the screw, and plug the cable of the bar code reader.
6 Power on the bar code reader, re-align the bar code scan position, and use an
adjustment tool of the bar code scan light of the BA24-J03 BA24 to perform
alignment according to steps described on the software. After the light of the bar
code reader is adjusted, tighten the retaining screw.
7 Assemble and reset the panel removed in step 2.

See 8.8.3 to align the bar code scan position.

5 Modules and Units
5.4.11 Replacing Reagent Carousel Antifogging Heating Assembly
When to do
Replace the assembly when the glass of the antifogging assembly is damaged or the
assembly fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

screws and spring washer and Small bracket for bar
Reagent carousel anti-
big flat washer code reader
fogging heater assembly
Anti-fogging mounting plate
M2×8 cross recessed pan
head screw
Dust shield and M3×8 cross recessed pan
Antifogging heater
sponge head screw
Heat conductive
Temperature
plate
switch
Bar code reader
Switch
anchor plate Rubber
cushion
M3×6 cross recessed M3×12 hexagon Glass
pan head screw socket cap head window
screw
How to do
deatching.
3 Remove the 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws, the spring washer, and the
big flat washer, and remove the bar code reader.
4 Remove the 4 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screws, and remove the dust shield
with sponge.
5 Remove the connectors of the temperature switch and the antifogging heater,
unscrew the 4 M3×8 cross pan head screws, and remove the antifogging heating
assembly of the reagent carousel.
6 Remove 1 M3×12 hexagon socket head cap screws, and remove the anchor plate of
the switch, the temperature protection switch, and the antifogging heater.

5 Modules and Units
7 Remove 4 M2×8 cross recessed pan head screws, remove the thermal conductive
aluminum plate and the damaged glass pane, and clear the broken glass in the slot of
the mounting plate. Replace the rubber pad when necessary.
8 Place a new glass pane onto the silicone pad in the slot of the mounting plate of the
antifogging apparatus. Ensure that the glass is not cracked or dirty.
9 Use 4 M2×8 cross recessed pan head screws to fasten the thermal conductive
aluminum plate into the mounting position.
10 Apply thermal paste onto the fitting surface between the antifogging heater (if the
heater is damaged, use a new antifogging heater) and the thermal conductive
aluminum plate, and place the heater in the mounting position.
11 Apply thermal paste onto the fitting surface between the temperature switch (if the
temperature switch is damaged, use a new temperature switch) and the antifogging
heater, and place switch in a middle position. Place the anchor plate of the switch in
the mounting position, and fasten it with 1 M3×12 hexagon socket head cap screw.
12 Use 4 M3×8 cross recessed pan head screws to install the reagent carousel
antifogging assembly into the mounting position of the reagent refrigeration
compartment.
13 Plug the cable of the temperature switch and the antifogging heater, use 4 M3×6
cross pan head screws to fasten the dust shield with sponge onto the mounting plate
of the antifogging apparatus.
14 Install the bar code reader into a small bracket of the bar code reader, and pre-
tighten the screw (plug the cable of the bar code reader).
15 Power on the bar code reader, re-align the bar code scan position, and use an
adjustment tool of the bar code scan light of the BA24-J03 BA24 to perform
alignment according to steps described on the software. After the light of the bar
code reader is adjusted, tighten the retaining screw.
16 Assemble and reset the panel removed in step 2.

See 8.8.3 to align the bar code scan position.

5 Modules and Units
5.5 Sample Probe Movement Assembly

The sample probe movement assembly includes a sample probe drive assembly, a sample
probe arm assembly, and a sample probe assembly. The sample probe movement
assembly can implement horizontal rotation movements and vertical movements; and
have the following functions: fluid level detection, clog detection, and vertical bump
detection; and have other functions such as mechanical limit stop, and power failure self-
lock.
Horizontal direction: The sample probe center can pass through the wash well, the
sample reagent carousel aspiration position, the reaction carousel/ISE dispensing
position->wash well->sample/reagent carousel aspiration position-> reaction carousel
dispensing position->wash well position, and meet the movement stroke requirements.
Vertical direction: The sample probe can move vertically at the reagent bottle, sample
container, reaction cuvette, wash well, and ISE dispensing port, and meet the movement
stroke requirements.

5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.22 Location of sample probe movement assembly in the instrument
Shielding Cover
Wash station desk
Reagent bar code assembly Reaction carousel panel
Lamp panel
Frame Assembly
Reaction Carousel Assembly
Sample/reagent
Left panel
carousel assembly Reagent refrigeration
assembly Front cover assembly

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.23 Sample probe movement assembly
6
3
7
2
8
1
Table 5.5 List of FRU materials

2 115-037085-00 BA24 HbA1c sample probe assembly FRU
3 033-000108-00 Anti-collision spring /
4 115-037552-00 Reagent preheating assembly FRU
5 051-002479-00 Level sense board PCBA FRU
6 041-009179-00 Hardened power screw (M3×6) /
7 BA30-10-06619 Synchronous belt B123MXL6.4 FRU
8 115-016625-00 3-probe drive horizontal motor assembly FRU
9 115-036662-00 Probe drive assembly FRU
10 044-000263-00 130mm arm base FRU
11 043-002344-00 130mm arm cover FRU
12 115-016462-00 Guide rod and anti-collision spring FRU
13 42 step motor 1 with belt pulley FRU
115-005246-00
(horizontal)
14 59 step motor 1 with belt pulley FRU
115-005247-00
(vertical)
15 115-015298-00 3-probe drive vertical motor assembly FRU

5 Modules and Units
5.5.3 Replacing Horizontal Movement Photocoupler and Vertical

Movement Photocoupler
When to do
Replace the horizontal movement photocoupler and the vertical movement photocoupler
when they fail.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Figure 5.24 Disassembling/assembling horizontal movement photocoupler and vertical
movement photocoupler

Horizontal Horizontal movement

sensor bracket photocoupler
Vertical movement photocoupler
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover and remove the lamp panel, the reaction carousel panel,
and the wash panel. Protect the sample probe from colliding during the
disassembling.

5 Modules and Units
3 When replacing the vertical movement photocoupler, remove the photocoupler cable,
remove 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to take out the vertical movement
photcoupler, use 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to fasten a new
photocoupler, and plug the cable.
4 When replacing the horizontal movement photocoupler, remove the photocoupler
cable, remove 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to take out the horizontal
sensor bracket with the photocoupler, remove 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head
screw to take out the horizontal movement photcoupler, use 1 M3×6 cross recessed
pan head screw to fasten a new photocoupler onto the horizontal sensor bracket,
use 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to fasten the horizontal sensor bracket
in the mounting position, and plug the photocoupler cable.
5 Install the panel that is disassembled in step 2.

N/A
5.5.4 Replacing Sample Probe Assembly, Anti-collision Spring and Power

Screw
When to do
Replace them when the sample probe assembly is damaged or the anti-collision spring
fails or the power screw has poor appearance.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead screwdriver / 1

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.25 Disassembling/assembling sample probe assembly, anti-collision spring and
power screw
130mm arm cover
Spring guide post
Anti-collision spring
Probe assembly
Hardened power screw

(M3×6)
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover.
3 Remove 2 hardened power screws (M3×6) to take out the 130mm arm cover. The
powder screw may be replaced directly.
4 Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the guide rod and take out the guide rod and the
anti-collision spring. The anti-collision spring may be replaced directly with a new
spring.
5 Remove the anti-collision detection cable connector, and clean the tube connector.
6 Remove the sample probe assembly, replace it with a new sample probe assembly,
plug the cable connector, and clean the tube connector.
7 Assemble and reset the assembly in the reversed order of steps 2~4.

N/A

5 Modules and Units
5.5.5 Replacing Reagent Preheating Assembly
When to do
Replace the reagent preheating assembly when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Figure 5.26 Disassembling/assembling reagent preheating assembly
130mm arm cover
Reagent preheating
assembly
Insulating plate
M3×8 cross
recessed pan head
screw
(M3×6)
How to do
3 Remove 2 hardened power screws (M3×6) to take out the 130mm arm cover.
4 Remove the reagent preheating assembly cable, remove the wash tube connector
from the sample probe, and remove the quick connector.
5 Remove 2 M3×8 cross recessed pan head screws, remove 2 insulation pads, and lay
flat the reagent preheating assembly. Disassemble the heating cover of the reagent
preheating assembly, and take out the wash tube.

5 Modules and Units
6 Prepare a new reagent preheating assembly, disassemble the heating cover of the
reagent preheating assembly, and assemble the heating cover after threading the
wash tube.
7 Place 2 insulation pads in the mounting position, and use two M3×8 cross recessed
pan head screws to pass through the insulation pads, and fasten the reagent
preheating assembly.
8 Tidy up the cable, interconnect the cable, tidy up the wash tube, reinstall the
terminals and the quick connector, and screw the quick connector into the assembly.
9 Use the sealing adhesive to seal the outlet and inlet of the wash tube of the reagent
preheating assembly, and the cable hole ends.
10 Assemble and reset the assembly in the reversed order of steps 2~3.

N/A
5.5.6 Replacing Level Sense Board
When to do
Replace the level sense board when necessary.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.27 Disassembling/assembling level sense board
130mm arm cover
Level sense board
M3×6 cross
recessed pan
head screw
Hardened power
screw (M3×6)
How to do
3 Remove 2 hardened power screws (M3×6) to take out the 130mm arm cover.
4 Remove the connector on the level sense board.
5 Remove 2 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screws, and remove the level sense board.
6 Replace the board with a new level sense board, and install and reset it in the
reversed order of the steps stated above.

N/A
5.5.7 Replacing Horizontal Rotating Synchronous Belt
When to do
Replace the horizontal rotating synchronous belt when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.28 Disassembling/assembling horizontal rotating synchronous belt
Horizontal rotary
synchronous belt
M3×8 hexagon
socket head cap
screw
How to do
Steps of replacing the horizontal rotating synchronous belt:
disassembling.
3 Draw an arc along the flat washers under the two M3×8 hexagon socket head cap
screws that fasten the outside of the motor.
4 Loosen 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws that fasten the motor, and remove
the synchronous belt.
5 Sheathe a new synchronous belt slowly from the tip into two pulleys.
6 Move the motor. When the flat washers under the two outside screws basically
overlap the arc drawn in step 3, tighten the 4 screws to fasten the motor.
7 Reset the panel disassembled in step 2.

N/A
5.5.8 Replacing Horizontal Motor Assembly
When to do
Replace the horizontal motor assembly when it fails.

5 Modules and Units
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 5.29 Horizontal motor assembly
Horizontal rotary
synchronous belt
M3×8 hexagon
socket head cap
screw
How to do
disassembling.
4 Remove the motor cable connector, remove 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws
and the spring/flat washers that are used to fasten the motor, and remove the
horizontal motor assembly.
5 Use 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washers to pre-tighten
a new horizontal motor, and move the motor until the flat washers under the two
outside screws basically overlap the arc drawn in step 3. Tighten the 4 screws to
fasten the motor, and plug the motor cable connector.

N/A

5 Modules and Units
5.5.9 Replacing Sample Probe Drive Assembly
When to do
Replace the sample probe drive assembly when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1

Figure 5.30 Horizontal motor assembly
130mm arm cover
Sample probe arm

assembly

head cap screws and
spring washer Hardened power
screw (M3×6)
Probe drive
assembly

head cap screws and
spring/flat washer

5 Modules and Units
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover, remove the sample/reagent carousel cover, and remove the
left panel assembly, front cover assembly, rear panel, lamp panel, reaction carosuel
panel, wash panel, and sample/reagent panel. Protect the sample probe from
colliding during the disassembling.
3 Remove the cable and wash tube that pass through the precision shaft, remove all
the cables and tube terminals, and take out the braided hose.
4 Remove vertical and horizontal motor connectors, and remove 2 photocoupling
connectors.
5 Remove 2 hardened power screws (M3×6) to take out the arm cover.
6 Remove 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring washers to take out
the sample probe arm assembly, and move the cable out of the precision shaft.
Prevent probe collision.
7 Remove 3 M6×16 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washers, and take
out the sample probe drive assembly from the instrument.
8 Place a new sample probe drive assembly into the mounting position, and use 3
M6×16 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washers to fasten the
assembly.
9 Thread the cable and tube on the sample probe arm assembly from the top of the
precision shaft, and use 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring
washers to pre-tighten the arm assembly onto the precision shaft.
10 Sheathe the braided hose into the cable and the tube, reinstall connectors of the cable,
and insert the cable into the corresponding slot. Screw the tube mounting terminals
and the quick connector into the corresponding port.
11 Connect the motor cable and the photocoupler cable.
12 See sections 8.5.1~8.5.9 to align positions from the sample probe to the reaction
carousel, wash well, sample/reagent carousel and ISE, tighten 2 M3×10 hexagon
socket head cap screws to fasten the arm assembly, and use 2 hardened powder
screws (M3×6) to install the arm cover.
13 Reassemble and reset the parts disassembled in step 2.

See sections 8.5.1~8.5.9 to align positions from the sample probe to the reaction carousel,
wash well, sample/reagent carousel, and ISE.

5 Modules and Units
5.6 Mixer Movement Assembly

The mixer movement assembly consists of a mixer drive assembly and an arm assembly.
The assembly can implement horizontal rotating movements and vertical movements, and
can stir the reaction mixture when the sample and the reagent are successively added.
Horizontal direction: The mixer center can pass through the wash well and the reaction
carousel mixing position, and meet movement stroke requirements.
Vertical direction: The mixer can perform vertical movements in the reaction cuvette
and the wash well, and meet the movement stroke requirements.
Figure 5.31 Location of mixer movement assembly in the instrument
Sample Probe Movement Mixer Movement Assembly

Assembly
Shielding Cover
Sample/reagent
carousel cover Wash station desk
Reagent bar code Reaction

assembly carousel panel
Lamp panel
Frame
Assembly
Reaction Carousel
Assembly
Sample/reagent
Left panel
carousel assembly Reagent refrigeration
assembly Front cover
assembly board and the bracket

5 Modules and Units

The mixer movement assembly is located right above the instrument.
Figure 5.32 Mixer movement assembly
6
2
1
7

2 BA30-10-06619 Synchronous belt B123MXL6.4 FRU
3 115-016625-00 3-probe drive horizontal FRU
motor assembly
4 BA30-10-15052 DC motor WRF-130CH FRU
5 BA31-20-41651 Mixer FRU
6 041-009179-00 Hardened power screw (M3×6) /
7 115-036665-00 Mixer drive assembly FRU
8 044-000333-00 65mm mixer arm base FRU
9 043-003064-00 65mm mixer arm cover FRU
10 BA31-20-41651+BA30-20-06774 Mixer assembly FRU
11 115-015298-00 3-probe drive vertical motor FRU
assembly
12 115-005246-00 42 step motor 1 with belt FRU
pulley (horizontal)
13 115-005247-00 59 step motor 1 with belt FRU
pulley (vertical)

5 Modules and Units
5.6.3 Replacing Horizontal Movement Photocoupler and Vertical

Movement Photocoupler
When to do
Replace the horizontal movement photocoupler and the vertical movement photocoupler
when they fail.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross screwdriver (long, short) / 1 each
Adjustable wrench / 1

Figure 5.33 Exploded view for installing horizontal movement photocoupler and
vertical movement photocoupler
Mixer Movement
Wash well support
Assembly
shaft

pan head screw
Horizontal movement
photocoupler
Horizontal sensor
bracket
pan head screw
Vertical movement
photocoupler

pan head screw
Replacement steps:
and the wash panel. Protect the mixer from colliding during the disassembling.

5 Modules and Units
3 When replacing the vertical movement photocoupler, remove the wash well support
shaft, remove the photocoupler cable, use a short crosshead screwdriver to take out
1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw and take out the vertical movement
photcoupler, use 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to fasten a new
photocoupler, and plug the cable. Install the wash well support shaft.
4 When replacing the horizontal movement photocoupler, remove the photocoupler
cable, remove 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to take out the horizontal
sensor bracket with the photocoupler, remove 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head
screw to take out the horizontal movement photcoupler, use 1 M3×6 cross recessed
pan head screw to fasten a new photocoupler onto the horizontal sensor bracket,
use 1 M3×6 cross recessed pan head screw to fasten the horizontal sensor bracket
in the mounting position, and plug the photocoupler cable.
5 Install the panel that is disassembled in step 2.

N/A
5.6.4 Replacing horizontal rotating synchronous belt
When to do
Replace the horizontal rotating synchronous belt when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.34 Installing horizontal rotating synchronous belt
Horizontal rotary
synchronous belt

head cap screw
Replacement steps:
2 Open the shielding cover, remove the sample/reagent carosuel cover, and remove
lamp panel, reaction carosuel panel, wash panel, and sample/reagent panel. Protect
the mixer from colliding during the disassembling.
4 Loosen 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws that fasten the motor, and remove
the synchronous belt.
5 Sheathe a new synchronous belt slowly from the tip into two pulleys.
6 Move the motor. When the flat washers under the two outside screws basically
overlap the arc drawn in step 3, tighten the 4 screws to fasten the motor.

N/A
5.6.5 Replacing Horizontal Motor Assembly
When to do
Replace the horizontal motor assembly when it fails.

5 Modules and Units
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 5.35 Exploded view for installing horizontal motor
Horizontal rotary
synchronous belt
head cap screws and
spring/flat washer
Horizontal motor
assembly
Replacement steps:
2 Open the shielding cover, remove the sample/reagent carousel cover, and remove
lamp panel, reaction carousel panel, wash panel, and sample/reagent panel. Protect
the mixer from colliding during the disassembling.
4 Remove the motor cable connector, remove 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws
and the spring/flat washers that are used to fasten the motor, and remove the
horizontal motor assembly.
5 Use 4 M3×8 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washers to pre-tighten
a new horizontal motor, and move the motor until the flat washers under the two
outside screws basically overlap the arc drawn in step 3. Tighten the 4 screws to
fasten the motor, and plug the motor cable connector.

5 Modules and Units

N/A
5.6.6 Replacing DC Motor, Mixer and Powder Screw
When to do
Replace them when the DC motor fails, or the mixer is bent, or the power screw has poor
appearance.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross screwdriver (big and small) / 1 each

Figure 5.36 Exploded view for installing DC motor, mixer and powder screw
Mixer arm cover

(M3×6)
DC motor

pan head screw and
flat washer
Retaining nut
Mixer
Replacement steps:
2 Open the shielding cover and remove the lamp panel. When necessary, remove the
left panel assembly and the front panel assembly.
3 Remove 2 hardened power screws (M3×6) to take out the mixer arm cover. The
powder screw may be replaced directly.
4 Loosen the retaining nut and remove the mixer. When repairing the mixer, replace
the mixer with a new mixer, and insert the mixer into the motor shaft and tighten
the retaining nut.

5 Modules and Units
5 Remove the motor cable, remove 2 M2×4 cross countersunk head screw and flat
washers, take out the DC motor, replace the motor with a new DC motor, and use 2
M2×4 cross countersunk head screws and flat washers to pre-tighten the motor.
Plug the motor cable.
6 Install the mixer, tighten the retaining nut and install the mixer arm cover.
7 Install the cover that is disassembled in step 2.

See 8.6.1 to align horizontal positions from mixer to reaction carousel
5.6.7 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly
When to do
Replace the mixer drive assembly when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1

5 Modules and Units

Figure 5.37 Exploded view of mixer drive assembly
Mixer arm cover
Mixer arm
assembly

Hardened power
head cap screws and
screw (M3×6)
spring washer
Mixer drive
assembly
M6×16 hexagon
socket head cap
screws and
spring/flat washer
Replacement steps:
2 Open the shielding cover, remove the sample/reagent carousel cover, and remove the
left panel assembly, front cover assembly, rear panel, lamp panel, reaction carosuel
panel, wash panel, and sample/reagent panel. Protect the mixer from colliding
during the disassembling.
3 Remove the cable that passes through the precision shaft, remove all the cables and
terminals, and take out the braided hose.
4 Remove vertical and horizontal motor connectors, and remove 2 photocoupling
connectors.
5 Remove 2 hardened power screws (M3×6) to take out the arm cover.
6 Remove 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring washers to take out
the mixer arm assembly, and move the cable out of the precision shaft. Prevent
mixer collision.
7 Remove 3 M6×16 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washers, and take
out the mixer drive assembly from the instrument.
8 Place a new mixer drive assembly into the mounting position, and use 3 M6×16
hexagon socket head cap screws and spring/flat washers to fasten the assembly.

5 Modules and Units
9 Thread the cable on the mixer arm assembly from the top of the precision shaft, and
use 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws and spring washers to pre-tighten the
arm assembly onto the precision shaft.
10 Sheathe the braided hose into the cable, reinstall connectors of the cable, and insert
the cable into the corresponding slot.
11 Connect the motor cable and the photocoupler cable.
12 See sections 8.6.1~8.6.3 to align positions from the mixer to the reaction carousel
and wash well, tighten 2 M3×10 hexagon socket head cap screws to fasten the arm
assembly, and use 2 hardened powder screws (M3×6) to install the arm cover.
13 Reassemble and reset the parts disassembled in step 2.

See 8.6.1~8.6.3 to align positions from mixer to reaction carousel and wash well.

5 Modules and Units
5.7 Wash Assembly
5.7 Wash Assembly

The wash assembly, located in the rear right of the whole unit, consists of the wash probe
assembly and wash probe drive assembly. It provides 4-phase wash for non-disposable
reaction cuvettes so that they can be used repeatedly without influencing the test effects.
The first 3 phases are wash phase probe assemblies. The wash probes of the first 1 to 3
phases have dispense and aspiration functions. The 4th phase is a wipe phase probe
assembly.
Figure 5.38 Location of wash assembly
Sample Probe Reaction

Sample/reagent Movement Auto Wash Carousel
carousel assembly Assembly Assembly Assembly
Frame Mixer Optical

Assembly Movement assembly
Assembly

5 Modules and Units
5.7 Wash Assembly
5.7.2 Locations and FRU Details

Figure 5.39 Wash assembly
Knurled
screw
Wash probe
drive assembly
Zero position
photocoupler

No.
1 115-036353-00 Wash probe assembly FRU
2 051-001147-00 BA48 wash station FRU
photocoupler PCBA
3 115-036352-00 Wash probe drive FRU
assembly
4 009-002204-00 Photocoupler cable (S) FRU / Zero position
photocoupler
5 Wash phase probe FRU
BA38-30-88154
assembly
6 Wipe phase probe FRU
BA40-30-61934
assembly
7 041-001845-00 Wipe block FRU

5 Modules and Units
5.7 Wash Assembly
5.7.3 Replacing Wash Probe Assembly
When to do
Replace the wash probes when they are bent or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Figure 5.40 Wash probe assembly
Cable anchor
plate
BA48 wash station

photocoupler
M2.5×4 cross recessed

pan head screw
How to do
2 Open the shielding cover assembly, unscrew 8 M4×8 cross pan head combination
screws to remove the rear panel.
3 Unplug the cable connector of the BA48 wash station photocoupler.
4 Unplug the tubes and cables on the wash probe assembly, and manually loosen the
knurled screw to remove the wash probe assembly.
5 Install the new wash probe assembly, manually tighten the knurled screw, and
restore the tubes and cables according to their numbers.

5 Modules and Units
5.7 Wash Assembly
NOTE:
Reinstall the tubes and cables on the wash probe assembly according to the number
marking.

Check the wash probes' vertical position in reaction cuvettes according to 8.7.3.
5.7.4 Replacing Wash Station Photocoupler
When to do
Replace the wash station photocoupler when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Figure 5.41 Wash station photocoupler
Cable anchor
plate
M2.5×4 cross
BA48 wash station recessed pan
photocoupler head screw
How to do

5 Modules and Units
5.7 Wash Assembly
2 Open the shielding cover assembly, unscrew 8 M4×8 cross pan head combination
screws to remove the rear panel.
3 Unplug the cable connector of the wash station photocoupler.
4 Unplug the tubes and cables on the wash probe assembly.
5 Manually loosen the knurled screw to remove the wash probe assembly.
6 Loosen 2 M2.5×8 cross countersunk head screws on the anchor plate and then
remove the anchor plate.
7 Loosen 1 M2.5×4 cross pan head screw on the wash station photocoupler, replace it
with a new one, and tighten 1 M2.5×4 cross pan head screw.
NOTE:
Reinstall the tubes and cables on the wash probe assembly according to the number
marking.

N/A
5.7.5 Replacing Wash Probe Drive Assembly
When to do
Replace the wash probe drive assembly when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

5 Modules and Units
5.7 Wash Assembly

Figure 5.42 Wash probe drive assembly
Knurled
screw
Position adjusting
plate
M4×16 hexagon
socket head cap screw
+ spring washer
Zero position
photocoupler

pan head screw

Motor support
block
How to do
to the wash well position, unscrew the M4X8 cross recessed pan head padded screw,
remove the BA24 reaction carousel panel (basic part), lamp panel, wash panel,
unscrew the 3 M4X8 cross recessed pan head screws for fastening the right panel
assembly, and remove the right panel assembly.
3 Unplug the zero position photocoupler and the motor, loosen 4 M4×12 hexagon
socket head cap screws with spring washer on the motor supporting block, replace
the wash probe drive assembly with a new one, and then fix it with 4 M4×12
hexagon socket head cap screws with spring washer. Do not tighten the 2 M4×16
hexagon socket head cap screws with spring washer on the wash probe drive
assembly, till you finish the alignment.

5 Modules and Units
5.7 Wash Assembly

Check the wash probes' vertical and horizontal positions in reaction cuvettes according
to 8.7.2~8.7.3.
5.7.6 Replacing Zero Position Photocoupler
When to do
Replace the zero position photocoupler on the wash probe drive assembly when it is
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 5.43 Zero position photocoupler on the wash probe drive assembly
Knurled screw
Position adjusting plate

head cap screw + spring
washer
Zero position
photocoupler

pan head screw

Motor support block

5 Modules and Units
5.7 Wash Assembly
How to do
2 Unscrew the 8 M4×8 cross pan head combination screws on the rear panel. Remove
the syringe drive assembly when removing the rear panel.
3 Unplug the connector of the zero position photocoupler.
4 Loosen 1 M3×8 cross pan head screw on the wash probe drive assembly, replace the
zero position photocoupler with a new one, and then fix it with 1 M3×8 cross pan
head screw.

Adjust the wash probes' vertical position in reaction cuvettes according to 8.7.3.

5 Modules and Units
5.8 Syringe Assembly

The syringe assembly includes 1 sample syringe assembly and 2 wash syringe assemblies.
1 of the wash syringe assemblies is used to inject wash solution, and is a 2.5ml syringe
assembly; and the other is used to inject deionized water, and is a hematology 10ml
syringe assembly.

Figure 5.44 Syringe assembly
Frame
Syringe
bracket weld
Syringe
module
Syringe left
bracket
2.5ml
syringe
assembly
Syringe left bracket
10 ml screw rod Power supply

driving syringe
assembly
assembly
Syringe lower
bracket

1 10 ml screw rod driving syringe FRU
115-011901-00
assembly
2 115-031800-00 2.5ml syringe assembly FRU
3 2800-21-28878 Motor position sensor assembly FRU
4 115-036403-00 BA25 syringe assembly /

5 Modules and Units
5.8.3 Replacing 2.5ml Syringe and 10ml Syringe
When to do
Replace the syringe when the syringe is abnormal.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
cross screwdriver / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1

See syringe assembly.
Replacement steps:
2 Pull out the tube and lines on the syringe, and use a hexagon socket wrench for
loosening. Fasten the 2.5ml syringe to the 4 hexagon screws of the left bracket and
lower bracket of the syringe, so that the 2.5ml syringe assembly can be taken out.
3 Pull out the tube and lines on the syringe, and use a hexagon socket wrench for
loosening. Fasten the 10ml screw rod driving syringe to the 4 hexagon screws of the
right bracket and lower bracket of the syringe, so that the 10ml screw rod driving
syringe assembly can be taken out.
4 After replacing the syringe with a new syringe, restore the assembly in the reversed
order.
5.8.4 Replacing Syringe

Refer to Section 9.3.2.

5 Modules and Units
5.9 Photoelectric Unit
5.9.1 Functions and Parameters

The BS-240 has inherited the mature filter light-splitting technology of Mindray's BS
series. The photoelectric detection unit uses a light source to illuminate directly. After
passing through the interference filter, composite light becomes monochromatic light of
a specific bandwidth. After being absorbed by a solution, the monochromatic beam is
received by a photodetector. The photodetector converts the optical signal with light
intensity into an electric signal. A microprocessing unit calculates the concentration of the
solution by calculating the change of the light intensity. Multiple monochromatic
wavelengths required in a photometric system are implemented by using a filter wheel
apparatus. During measurement, filters are sequentially shifted into the optical path to
implement colorimetric measurement of each wavelength.
Technical Parameters
 Optical system method: filter wheel forward-splitting system, optical-to-electric
conversion of silicon photodiode.
 Wavelength range: 8 wavelengths: 340nm, 405nm, 450nm, 510nm, 546nm, 578nm,
630nm, and 670nm
 Wavelength accuracy: ±2nm
 Light source index: 12V/20W tungsten-halogen lamp
 Minimum reaction volume: 100μl
 Absorbance range: 0-4A, 10mm light pathlength
 Optical pathlength of reaction cuvette: 5mm
 Number of cuvettes: 8 segments, including 40 cuvettes in total
 Cuvette cavity dimensions: 5mm×5mm×29.5mm
 Cuvette material: plastic
Terms of Optics
 AD value: the value converted from photoelectric signal (voltage) through AD
converter.
 Water blank: the AD value of a cuvette measured when the wash station dispenses
water in phase 6. Water blank is the base point for calculation absorbance, that is,
the 0 point of absorbance.
 Cuvette blank out of range: means the water blank of phase 6 is less than the light
intensity low limit. This alarm is used to monitor the energy level of the optical
system to ensure normal signal-to-noise ratio.

5 Modules and Units
Cuvette blank out of range (10X): means the relative change of continuous phase-6 water
blanks for 10 cuvettes is greater than 3% comparing with the history data. This alarm is
used to prevent light fluctuation or erroneous result due to cuvette overflowing and to
remind the operator of this phenomenon.
5.9.2 Composition and Structure of Optical Assembly

The BS-240 optical assembly uses a filter wheel plus a PD to for photometric
measurement. See the figure below. The light source illuminates directly, and the beam is
converged by the lens 1 and then split by the filter. A monochromatic beam is shaped by
the lens 2 and then passes through the cuvette. After being absorbed by the solution, the
beam is converged by the lens 3. Finally, the optical signal is received by the photodiode
and converted into an electric signal for outputting. The whole optical path is from the
reaction carousel inwards.
Figure 5.45 Optical path
Light source Lens 1 Filter Cuvettes Lens 3
Photodiode
Lens 2 Optical base

5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.46 Location of optical assembly
Optical assembly
The optical assembly consists of a light source assembly and a measurement assembly.
No FRU No. or Part No. Part Name Remar

ks
1 115-038466-00 20W lamp assembly (FRU) FRU
2 041-001143-00 Lamp base retaining screw FRU

3 BA10-20-78211 Patch cord for lamp housing fan FRU
4 801-BA10-00099-00 Preamplifier board PCBA(FRU/C) FRU
5 115-036571-00 Cuvette (Surface processed) FRU
6 801-BA10-00041-00 Filter 340 (C) FRU
7 801-BA10-00042-00 Filter 405 (C) FRU
8 801-BA10-00043-00 Filter 450 (C) FRU
9 801-BA10-00044-00 Filter 510 (C) FRU
10 801-BA10-00045-00 Filter 546 (C) FRU
11 801-BA10-00046-00 Filter 578 (C) FRU
12 801-BA10-00047-00 Filter 630 (C) FRU
13 801-BA10-00048-00 Filter 670 (C) FRU
14 801-BA10-00004-00 AD collection board (C) FRU

5 Modules and Units
5.9.3 Replacing Lamp
When to do
Replace the lamp when an alarm is triggered indicating that the lamp has insufficient
intensity, or not turned on, or has been used for over 2000 hours,
or has cuvette blank out of range (10X).
Tools
Cross screwdriver

Figure 5.47 Exploded view of lamp mounting position
Optical assembly
Lamp
assembly Wiring terminal nut
(screwed manually)
Lamp retaining
screw
NOTE:
Replace the lamp according to the instructions on the screen.
Please wait for at least 5 minutes (if the lamp fan works properly) after turning off the
lamp to avoid injury.
Do not touch the bulb when installing the new lamp. In case of touching, please clean
the bulb with fiber cloth or ethanol-moistened gauze.
How to do
1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance, and
select Replace Lamp.
2 Follow the instructions prompted by the software and wait for 10 minutes until the
lamp cools down.
3 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the screws of the lamp panel, and remove the panel.
4 Unscrew the cable connectors and the lamp base retaining screws with hands, to
remove the lamp.

5 Modules and Units
5 Install the lamp and panel in a reversed order. Before installing the panel, ensure that
the lamp has been installed properly in the right place and there is no gap between
the lamp and the lamp base.
6 Select "Continue" and wait for 5 minutes for the new lamp to get steady. Select
"Photometer Check" to check if the lamp can work normally.

Refer to the alignment section.
5.9.4 Disassembling/Assembling Optical Assembly
When to do
Remove the optical assembly before replacing the filter, preamplifier board, and lamp
radiating fan.
Tools
Cross screwdriver and hexagon wrench

Figure 5.48 Exploded view of optical assembly
Insulation
baffle plate Wiring terminal bracket
M4 hexagon Wiring
nut terminal nut
Adjusting washer
Stop bolt

5 Modules and Units
NOTE:
Do not touch the optical surface of the filter with a hand during
disassembling/assembling.
During disassembling, please wait for at least 5 minutes (if the lamp fan works properly)
after turning off the lamp, so as to avoid burn.
Do not lose the adjustment washer under the assembly during disassembling.
How to do
1 Switch off the power supply of the instrument.
2 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the screws of the lamp panel, and remove the
panel and the panel on the top of the reaction carousel.
3 Refer to the Section about the reaction carousel unit maintenance to remove the
upper cover of the reaction chamber and remove the reaction carousel.
4 Remove the right cover.
5 Unplug the power cord of the lamp radiating fan.
6 Unplug the cable between the preamplifier board and the AD collection board.
7 Use a hand to unscrew off the nuts on the cable terminals, and then remove the lamp
power cord terminal from the terminals.
8 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the 2 screws that fasten the wiring terminal
bracket, and remove the wiring terminal bracket together with the wiring terminal
from the optical assembly.
9 Unscrew the screws that fasten the fiber baffle plate, and remove the fiber baffle
plate.
10 Use a hexagon wrench to remove the 3 M4 hexagon screws that fasten the optical
assembly.
11 Extract the optical assembly upwards. Adjustment washes may exist under the
assembly, which should not be lost and shall be restored after installation. The
positions of the washers are shown in the following figure, and the semicircle of the
washer clasps the positioning pin.
12 Install the optical assembly in reserved order of the foregoing steps.

5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.49 Location of washer
Adjusting washer
Stop bolt
5.9.5 Replacing Filter
When to do
Replace the filter when an alarm indicates that the light intensity is low and when energy
of a wavelength channel is confirmed weak.
Tools
Hexagon wrench, cross screwdriver
How to do
1 Remove the optical assembly according to the method described in the previous
section.
2 According to the following figure and the following table, find the holes of the filter of
the corresponding wavelength. Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the retaining
screws and washers on both ends of the filter that needs to be replaced, and remove
the filter. The outer cylinder surface of the filter has filter center wavelength
silkscreen, which may be used to check again whether the filter is expected to be
replaced.

5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.50 Exploded view for replacing filter
Filter retaining
screw
Filter retaining
washer
Filter retaining
washer
Filter hole No.
Hole 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Filter wavelength (nm) 340 405 546 670 450 510 578 630
3 Install a new filter in reversed order of the foregoing steps.

4 Install the optical assembly in reserved order of the foregoing steps.
5 Select "Maintenance"->"Alignment" -> "Photoelectric Gain Adjustment". For details,
see the Section about alignment.
NOTE:
Do not touch the optical surface of the filter with a hand during
disassembling/assembling.
5.9.6 Replacing Preamplifier Board
When to do
The preamplifier board may need to be replaced when no photoelectric signal is output
or a dark current is abnormal.
Tools
Cross screwdriver and hexagon wrench
How to do
1 Remove the optical assembly according to the method.
2 See the following figure. Use a screwdriver to remove the retaining screws of the
shielding cover, and remove the shielding cover.

5 Modules and Units
3 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the retaining screws of the preamplifier board,
and gently take out the preamplifier board.
4 Install the preamplifier board in reversed order. Use water as sample or reagent to
request test, the reaction curve must be flat and straight.
Figure 5.51 Exploded view for installing related parts on preamplifier board side on
optical base
Retaining
Optical base screws on the Leaf spring Lens base Lens
shielding cover
Washer
Preamplifier
board
Preamplifier board
retaining screw
Shielding cover
NOTE:
The parts such as the lens and the lens base in the holes on the preamplifier board in
the optical base are fixed by using only the preamplifier board, and are not fixed by
other means. Therefore, the preamplifier board should be taken out upwards. When
placing the optical assembly after the preamplifier board is taken out, the mounting
holes should face upwards to prevent dropping of the parts in the holes.

Refer to the Section about alignment.
5.9.7 Replacing lamp fan
When to do
Replace the lamp radiating fan when it fails.
Tools
Flathead screwdriver, hexagon wrench

5 Modules and Units
How to do
1 Remove the optical assembly according to the method.
2 See the following figure. Use a screwdriver to remove 4 screws that fasten the fan,
and remove the fan.
3 Install a new fan, and fasten it with screws.
NOTE:
The fan radiates heat towards the lamp base. During installation, the fan surface that
bears characters faces the optical base, and the surface without characters faces
outwards.
Figure 5.52 Exploded view of lamp radiating fan
Lamp base Light source

radiating fan
Fan retaining
screws
5.9.8 Replacing Reaction Cuvette
When to do
Replace a cuvette if,
 it is detected abnormal through the Cuvette Check procedure; or

 scratches or cracks are found on the optical surface of the cuvette.
WARNING
While installing the reaction cuvettes, exercise caution to avoid scratching them. Do
not touch the optical surface of the reaction cuvettes. If the optical surface is polluted,
the obtained absorbance may be inaccurate.
Wear gloves free of fiber and powder to avoid polluting the optical surface of the
reaction cuvettes.

5 Modules and Units
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles during the maintenance process.
Tools
Cross screwdriver, fiber-free gloves, dry cloth or gauze, reaction cuvettes, and
concentrated wash solution manufactured by our company
How to do
1 Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance.
2 Choose Replace Cuvette.
3 Select Next.
4 Type in the position number of the cuvette segment you want to replace.
The input range is 1-8. Only one position number can be entered each time.
5 Select Replace.
6 Push open the cuvette window cover. Loosen the cuvette anchor plate screw with a
hand, flip the anchor plate screw rightward, and take out the reaction cuvette.
7 Install a new reaction cuvette, flip back the reaction cuvette anchor plate, and tighten
it with a hand.
Note: If all or many segments need to be replaced, the analyzing unit or the mains supply
may be turned off first. Push open the cuvette window. Rotate the reaction carousel
with a hand to replace the reaction cuvette.
8 After completion of replacing the cuvette, close the cuvette window cover.
9 Select "Utility"->"Maintenance"->"Maintenance"->"Biochemical Maintenance
Instruction"->"Reaction Cuvette Detection" to check whether the new cuvette meets
the requirements. Note: If the cuvette detection is not performed, the water blank of
the new cuvette may be too big to use, or an alarm "Water blank out of range (10X)"
appears.
5.9.9 Replacing AD collection board
When to do
The AD collection board may need to be replaced when no photoelectric signal is output
or a dark current is abnormal.
Maintenance Tools
Cross screwdriver and antistatic gloves
How to do
1 Power off the analyzing unit or the instrument.

5 Modules and Units
2 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the right cover of the instrument.

3 See the following figure. Use a cross screwdriver to remove the screws that fasten
the upper cover of the AD box, and remove the upper cover of the AD box.
4 Unplug the signal cable between the AD collection board and the main control board.
5 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the screws that fasten the AD collection board,
and remove the AD collection board.
6 Install a new AD collection board in reversed order of the foregoing steps.
Figure 5.53 Exploded view of AD collection board
Signal cable interface
AD collection board
AD box upper cover
NOTE:
Wear ESD gloves when replacing the AD collection board.

Refer to the Section about alignment.

5 Modules and Units
5.10 ISE Unit (Optional)
5.10.1 Module Functions

The ISE module is an optional module for the fully-automated chemistry analyzer and
designed to measure the concentration of K+, Na+ and Cl- in serum, plasma and diluted
urine. The sample volume for measurement is: 70µl for serum and plasma, 140µl for
urine diluted at the ratio of 1:9 (1 for urine and 9 for diluent).
5.10.2 Structure and FRU List

The ISE unit consists of the ISE module, pump module and reagent module,functions of
which are introduced in the following table.
Table 5.10 Components of ISE Unit
Name Functions
ISE module The ISE module has the following electrodes: Na+, K+, Cl-,
and reference. It analyzes and measures sample dispensed
through the injection port.
Pump module Three peristaltic pumps are contained to transfer reagent
and liquid waste.
Reagent module The reagent module integrates calibrator A, calibrator B,
waste container, and a chip used for monitoring reagent
inventory. It provides reagent for sample analysis and stores
the liquid waste herein.
The figure below shows the composition of the module.

5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.54 Exploded view for installation of Measuring module
ISE shielding
box
ISE shielding
cover
Figure 5.55 Exploded view for installation of pump module
Pump bracket
Peristaltic
Pump

5 Modules and Units
Figure 5.56 Exploded view for installation of reagent module
Figure 5.57 ISE measuring system tube connection
Calibrator B Calibrator A
ISE
Pump
Pump B Pump A
Waste well W

1 115-004626-00 K electrode FRU
2 115-004627-00 Na electrode FRU
3 115-004630-00 Cl electrode FRU
4 115-004625-00 Reference electrode FRU
5 115-004628-00 Spacer FRU
6 BA34-10-63657 Main control board of the ISE FRU
module
7 BA34-10-63659 Pre-amplification board of the ISE FRU
module
8 BA34-10-63658 Compression plate FRU
9 801-BA34-00104-00 ISE module bubble detector FRU
10 801-BA34-00103-00 Sample tube of ISE module FRU
11 BA34-10-63663 O ring of ISE module (3) FRU
12 BA34-10-63668 O ring of ISE electrode FRU
13 082-000684-00 Peristaltic Pump FRU
14 801-BA34-00105-00 The peristaltic pump tube(3 pcs) FRU
15 BA34-10-63666 ISE waste tube connector FRU

5 Modules and Units
16 BA34-10-63667 Tube connector of ISE (4) FRU

17 801-BA34-00106-00 ISE module plastic tube for A ,B FRU
and W liquid
18 BA34-10-63812 ISE module wand FRU
5.10.3 Unclogging Waste Tubes
When to do
If the sample contains insoluble substances like fibrin or other substances, they can be
accumulated in the waste tube after long time use, causing clogging of the waste tube.
Maintenance Tools
Name Code Quantity
Unclogging tool for ISE 115-023372-00 1
WARNING
Do not spill liquid on the analyzer. Liquid ingression may cause equipment damage.
BIOHAZARD
NOTE
Excessive bleach and deionized water flushed into the ISE reagent pack waste bag may
cause waste bag over expansion and clog the Cal A & Cal B reagent flow.
To prevent this problem, connect to an old used-up reagent pack or use the connector
of the used-up reagent.
How to do
1 Ensure the analyzer is on idle (standby) condition. Open the ISE cover on the right
side analyzer panel.
2 Remove the electrode housing cover. Remove the waste tube fitting from the bottom
of the right angle adaptor. Remove waste peri-pump tube from the pump bracket.
Refer to pictures below.
3 Connect the waste tube fitting to a syringe and unclogging tool with 5 mL of
undiluted household bleach. Refer to pictures below.
4 Press the wand release button to remove the wand from the current in use ISE
reagent pack and keep it in a save place. Engage the wand to an old used-up reagent
pack.

5 Modules and Units
5 Inject bleach into the ISE waste tube and soak the tube for 5 minutes. Discharge the
waste into the reagent pack.
Note: When the bleach cannot be injected into the ISE pack, remove the wand and push
down to open the waste valve manually with a sharp object, and then inject again. If
bleach can go through this time, the waste bag was clogged and cannot be used. If
bleach still cannot be injected, replacing the ISE wand is recommended.
6 Repeat this step with 5 mL of deionized water without the 5 minutes of soaking time.
7 Remove the wand from the old use-up pack and re-install it back to the current in
use ISE pack. Re-install the waste tube fitting back to the ISE electrode housing right
angle adaptor and waste peri-pump tube back to the pump bracket. Re-install the
housing cover.

Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully unclogged.
5.10.4 Replacing Pump Tube
When to do
Replace the pump tube when it is aged or leaking or has not been maintained for a half
year.
Maintenance Tools
Cross screwdriver, pump tube.
Precautions:
BIOHAZARD
How to do
2 Execute Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- ISE Maintenance – Reagent Unpack.
3 Execute Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- ISE Maintenance – Replace Pump Tube
and Calibrator Tube.
4 Select "Pump Tube".
5 Replace it with new one. Make sure the connectors and tubes are correctly
connected; otherwise ISE module failure may occur.
6 Load the reagent pack and the procedure is completed.
7 Install back the right side panel.

5 Modules and Units
8 Record the maintenance log.

Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully replaced.
5.10.5 Replacing Calibrator Tube
When to do
Replace the calibrator tube when it is aged or leaking or has not been maintained for over
one year.
Maintenance Tools
Cross screwdriver, calibrator tube
Precautions:
BIOHAZARD
How to do
2 Execute Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- ISE Maintenance – Reagent Unpack.
3 Execute Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- ISE Maintenance – Replace Pump Tube
and Calibrator Tube.
4 Select Calibrator Tube.
5 Replace it with new one. Make sure the connectors and tubes are correctly
connected; otherwise ISE module failure may occur.
6 Load the reagent pack and the procedure is completed.
7 Install back the right side panel.
8 Record the maintenance log.

Perform ISE pump calibration and if it succeeds, the tube has been successfully replaced.

5 Modules and Units
5.10.6 Inventory Calculation of Reagent Pack

Reagent pack as one part of the ISE module should be installed as instructed by this
manual. You should install reagent pack while the analyzer is powered off, and then check
the reagent inventory and prime the ISE module with Calibrator A and B. If the reagent
pack is not properly installed, error may be produced in inventory calculation, and the
actual volume may differ from that displayed on the screen.
The following operations may result in the actual inventory of the ISE reagent pack less
than the displayed one.
1 When the analyzer is turned on and the ISE module is in failure status, the reagent
pack is changed, without recovering the module failure or checking the inventory
immediately.
Operation explanation: When the ISE module is in Stopped status, the software will stop
writing volume information into the reagent pack chip. However, the analyzer will
automatically execute the sip action of the ISE module during startup to consume
certain amount of reagent. Therefore, when the reagent pack is replaced, but the ISE
module is not restored or the screen display refreshed, the software will not calculate
the reagent consumption volume until reading the new reagent pack. At this
moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume - consumption of Sip after
replacing the reagent pack, which means that the actual reagent volume is less than
the displayed volume on the screen.
2 When the analyzer is powered on but the software is closed or the computer is shut
down, the reagent pack is changed.
Operation explanation: During shutdown, the analyzer will automatically execute the
sip action of the ISE module to consume certain amount of reagent. When the
analyzer is started up, the software will detect a new reagent pack and zero the
consumption that is not written into the reagent pack chip, and then display the
volume read from the reagent pack chip. At this moment, the actual reagent volume
= displayed volume - consumption of Sip after replacing the reagent pack, which
means that the actual reagent volume is less than the displayed volume on the screen.
down, the reagent pack is switched to another analyzer and then installed back after
use.
Operation explanation: During shutdown process, the analyzer cannot detect if the
reagent pack is normal. If the reagent pack is installed on the current instrument
after being used on another one, the analyzer, when started up, will detect that the
recorded reagent volume on the chip is less than the original one, and the software
will zero the reagent consumption of Sip during shutdown and display the read
volume on the screen. At this moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume
- consumption of Sip during shutdown (with reagent pack installed), which means
that the actual reagent volume is less than the displayed volume on the screen.

5 Modules and Units
4 The ISE module is de-configured, but the reagent pack is still on the instrument.
Operation explanation: Though the ISE module is de-configured, the original reagent
pack information is not cleared from the database. When the ISE module is
configured again with the same reagent pack, the Sip period without ISE module will
be included in calculation of the reagent consumption.
NOTE:
 In condition 1, restore the ISE module and check the reagent inventory immediately
to minimize or eliminate the calculation error.
 In condition 2 and 3, before running the operating software to start up the analyzer,
remove the reagent pack and then run the operating software. After the startup
procedure is complete, re-install the reagent pack and inquire the reagent volume
immediatelyto minimize or eliminate the calculation error.
 In condition 4, remove the reagent pack and then de-configure the ISE module.
The following operations may result in the actual inventory of the ISE reagent pack more
than the displayed one.
1 When the analyzer is turned on and the ISE reagent pack is changed, without
checking the inventory immediately.
Operation explanation: The analyzer will automatically refresh the ISE reagent
consumption, by subtracting the consumption of calibrator A or B from the known
volume (of the original reagent pack) and writing it into the reagent pack chip,
when calibrator A or B is consumed for 1%. The written volume is based on the
original reagent pack before replacement, and the volume of a used reagent pack is
often less than that of a new one. So the volume recorded on the chip of the new
reagent pack is less than the actual volume, and the actual volume is greater than the
displayed volume on the screen.
down, the reagent pack is removed for storage, and re-installed before the operating
software is run.
Operation explanation: During shutdown process, the analyzer cannot detect if the
reagent pack is normal. If the reagent pack is loaded before the analyzer is started up,
the analyzer, when started up, will detect that the reagent volume recorded on the
chip is same as that recorded by the software, but the software will confirm by
mistake the reagent consumption of sip during shutdown. (Actually, no reagent is
consumed.)Therefore, after calculating the reagent consumption, the software will
write the new volume information onto the chip and display it on the screen. At this
moment, the actual reagent volume = displayed volume + consumption of Sip during
shutdown (with reagent pack installed), which means that the actual reagent volume
is greater than the displayed volume on the screen.
3 The analyzer is powered off after the operating software is closed, and it is powered
on again before the operating software is run.

5 Modules and Units
Operation explanation: When closed normally, the operating software cannot detect if
the ISE module is working. When powered on before the software is run, the
analyzer, when started up, will detect that the reagent volume recorded on the chip is
same as that recorded by the software, but the software will confirm by mistake the
reagent consumption of sip during shutdown. (Actually, no reagent is consumed
because the ISE module is not working while the analyzer is powered off.)Therefore,
after calculating the reagent consumption, the software will write the new volume
information onto the chip and display it on the screen. At this moment, the actual
reagent volume = displayed volume + consumption of Sip during shutdown (with
reagent pack installed), which means that the actual reagent volume is greater than
the displayed volume on the screen.
NOTE:
 In condition 1, inquire the ISE reagent volume immediatelyto minimize or eliminate

the calculation error.
 In condition 2 and 3, before running the operating software to start up the analyzer,
remove the reagent pack and then run the operating software. After the startup
procedure is complete, re-install the reagent pack and inquire the reagent volume
immediatelyto minimize or eliminate the calculation error.

5 Modules and Units

6 Hardware Circuits

6 Hardware Circuits
6.1 Overview
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the functions of the PCBAs (printed circuit board assemblies)
used on the BS-240 Chemistry Analyzer.

6 Hardware Circuits
6.2 Hazards
6.2 Hazards
NOTE:
While the instrument is working, do not touch the hardware circuit boards with your
hands or other objects.
Before removing a circuit board, disconnect the instrument from the (AC) power supply.
Please wear a pair of anti-static gloves or take other measures to prevent static
electricity prior to removing a circuit board.

6 Hardware Circuits
6.3 Summary of PCBAs

Sequence number and function description of PCBAs
The table bellows provides a summary of the PCBAs used on the BS-240 Chemistry
Analyzer and briefly describes their functions.
Table 6.1 Summary of PCBAs
PCBA (PCB) Functions No.

Main Control Board The main control board is the control center of the BS- #1
051-002414-00 240. It is mainly used to fulfill the following tasks:
communicating with a computer through the RS232
serial port to transmit data and instructions;
communicating with the smart modules, including the
ISE module, through the extended serial ports to
transmit data and instructions; and controlling digital
potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric data
collection of the AD collection board and receiving the
photoelectric data.
Power drive board Controlling and driving the sample/reagent probe, #2
051-002413-00 sample/reagent mixer, sample/reagent carousel,
reaction carousel, cuvette wash station, wash syringe,
and related parts.
Reagent refrigeration The reagent refrigeration board is used to drive the #3
board reagent refrigeration circuit (including heatsinks),
BA20-30-75227 fans, and demisting circuit of the reagent bar code
reader.
Level sense board The two boards respectively sense the level of samples #4
051-002479-00 and reagents, and detect/convert the signals of the
two vertical obstruct detection sensors.
AD collection board The AD collection board adjusts the photoelectric #5
BA10-30-77759 signals output by the pre-amplification board and
controls it for AD conversion. It provides an SPI
interface for connecting with the main control board.
Pre-amplification Board The pre-amplification board converts the signals of the #6
BA10-30-77760 discrete photodiode array from analog to digital.
Power supply board These boards are used to power the whole unit, #7
051-002404-00 outputting the A12V, A5V digital, D12V/E12V analog,
C12V power, B24V power, and the B12V power for
partial Peltiers.
For locations of boards in the instrument, see the following exploded view.

6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.1 Locations of boards in the instrument (1)
Power drive board
Main Control Board

Power supply board

6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.2 Locations of boards in the instrument (2)
Level sense board
board
Pre-amplification AD collection
Board board

6 Hardware Circuits
6.4 Functions of PCBA
6.4.1 Control Structure

The BS-240 Chemistry Analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer), operation unit
(computer), and output unit (printer).
The analyzing unit (analyzer) is composed of the temperature control system, reaction
system (including ISE module), photometric system, sample/reagent handling system,
mixer system, and cuvette wash station.
The general control structure of the BS-240 is shown in the figure below.
The hardware system has the following functions:
 Communicating with a computer through the serial port, and receiving/sending

commands, responses, and data.
 Controlling data collection of the photometric system.
 Controlling movement and status signal collection of execution units.
 Controlling working and temperature control signal collection of the temperature
control system.
Figure 6.3 Overall functions
Optical System
Photoelectric signal
Control signal
Temperature
control signal
Temperature control
PC RS232 Hardware System
system
Control signal
Control signal
Position signal
Drive and execute

system
6.4.2 Main Control Board
Functions and Principles

The main control board (051-002414-00) is used to fulfill the following functions:
 Communicating with a computer through the serial port to transmit data and
instructions and to update the application programs of the PCBA.

6 Hardware Circuits
 Communicating with the smart modules, including the ISE module, through the
extended serial ports to transmit data and instructions.
 Controlling digital potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric data collection of the
AD collection board and receiving the photoelectric data.
 Detecting position signal and horizontal obstruct signal.
 Detecting level sense signal and vertical obstruct signal through the interface for the
level sense board.
The figure below shows the relation between the main control board and other PCBAs.
Figure 6.4 Relation between main control board and other PCBAs
Power
supply
board
Reagent
Main Control Power drive
refrigeration
Board board
board
AD collection
board
Preamplifier
board
The functional diagram of the main control board is shown below.

6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.5 Functional diagram of main control board
Bus Drive clock/direction signal

Injection unit
TTL Serial
Port Probe wash pump valve signal
Location sensor
Bus
Drive clock/direction signal
Level floater Mixer Unit
TTL Serial
Wash pump valve signal
Port
Bus
Reaction Unit Drive clock/direction signal
PC TTL Serial
Port
FPGA Drive clock/direction signal
Bus
Cuvette Wash Unit
TTL Serial
Port
Bus Reaction carousel heater control signal

Temperature
Control signal of deionized water heater
TTL Serial
Control Unit
Control signal of wash solution heater
Port
Bus Main Control Unit
Main Control Board
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the main control board is shown below.

6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.6 PCB layout of main control board
Connectors
The main control board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J2): 6-pin, providing +12V analog, +5V digital for the PCBAs.
Pin No. Signal Reference

Value
1 +5V 4.75~5.25V
2 GND /
3 / /
4 / /
5 12V 11.4~-12.6V
6 GND /
Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals:
 Connector (J7) for PC: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with a computer.
 Connector (J1) for drive signal: 40-pin, TTL, used for transmitting a control signal to
the power drive board.
 Connector (J39) for AD collection board: DB25, used for communication with the AD
collection board and providing power supply for it.
 Connector (J6) for ISE module: 8-pin, RS232, used for communication with the ISE
module.

6 Hardware Circuits
 Connector (J5) for bar code module: 8-pin, RS232, used for communication with the
bar code module.
 Connector (J12) for photocoupler: 36-pin, used for input of movement station
position sensor.
 Connector (J13) for photocoupler: 36-pin, used for input of movement station
position sensor.
 Connector (J14) for photocoupler: 10-pin, used for input of level floater sensor.
 Connector (J18) for temperature sensor: 4-pin, used for input of reaction carousel
temperature sensor.
 Connector (J21) for temperature sensor: 4-pin, used for input of deionized water
temperature sensor.
 Connector (J22) for temperature sensor: 4-pin, used for input of wash solution
temperature sensor.
 Connector (J23) for temperature sensor: 4-pin, used for input of reagent preheating
temperature sensor.
 Connector (J11) for power supply and signal output of level sense board: 4-pin, used
to input a level signal and an anti-collision signal into and provide a power supply
for the level sense board.
Connectors for debugging:
 JTAG connector (J8): 10-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
Indicators
The main control board contains the following indicators.
 +12V power supply indicator (D8): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is
turned on, indicating that the +12V power supply has been connected.
 +3.3V power supply indicator (D9): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is
turned on, indicating that the +3.3V power supply has been connected.
 Analog +12V power supply indicator (D20): green. It is lit when the analyzer power
switch is turned on, indicating that the analog +12V power supply has been
connected.
 Analog -12V power supply indicator (D21): green. It is lit when the analyzer power
switch is turned on, indicating that the analog -12V power supply has been
connected.
 D19: orange FPGA configuration indicator. On indicates FPGA is successfully
configured.
 D14: Green FPGA working status indicator. LED is flashing every second, indicating
FPGA works normally.

6 Hardware Circuits
 D23: Green. When communication with the lower layer unit is interrupted, the
indicator is lit.
Test points
In the following positions of the main control board can signal tests be performed.
 12V: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.

 P12V: analog +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.
 N12V: analog -12V power supply input. Normal range: -11.4 - -12.6V.
 VDD: +3.3V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the major
digital circuits of the PCBA. Normal range: 2.97 - 3.63V.
 2.5V: +2.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used for FPGA downloading.
Normal range: 2.25 - 2.75V.
 1.2V: +1.2V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the FPGA
core. Normal range: 1.14 - 1.26V.
Installation Methods and Precautions
NOTE:
Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and wear
a pair of anti-static gloves or wrist straps.
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.
Check the connectors with locks and ensure they have been locked properly.
Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J1 and J12~J13. Hold the
PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being
deformed or damaged.
After connecting J39 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides of it.
Parameters should be saved before uninstalling the board, and can be loaded after the
board is replaced.
6.4.3 Power drive board
Description
 The power drive board controls and drives the step motors, DC motors and valves.
 Receiving action signals from the main control board through the relevant interface.

6 Hardware Circuits
 Controlling and driving movements of the wash station, wash syringe,

sample/reagent/reagent carousel, sample/reagent/reagent probe, mixer, reaction
carousel, valves, etc.
The functional diagram of the power drive board is shown below.
Figure 6.7 Power drive board
Power drive board

Bus Drive clock/direction signal
Injection unit
TTL Serial Probe vertical motor
Probe wash pump valve signal
Port
Location sensor Probe horizontal motor
Probe syringe motor
Bus Motor
Drive clock/direction signal
Level floater Mixer Unit drive
TTL Serial A3985/A3
Port CPLD
979
Bus
Reaction Unit Drive clock/direction signal
PC TTL Serial Wash syringe motor
Port
FPGA Drive clock/direction signal
Bus
Cuvette Wash Unit
Pump/
TTL Serial
Port
Wash pump valve signal Valve Pump/ valve
Drive
Pump/Valve
Drive
Bus Reaction carousel heater control signal
Temperature 220V heater drive Reaction Carousel Heater
Control signal of deionized water heater
TTL Serial
Control Unit 220V heater drive Deionized Water Heater
Control signal of wash solution heater
Port 220V heater drive Wash Solution Heater
Bus Main Control Unit Power supply board
Main Control Board
Description
The PCB layout of the power drive board is shown below.

6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.8 Power drive board PCB
Connectors:
The power drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J17): 8-pin, providing analog 24V and 12V and digital +5V for the
PCBAs.
Pin No. Signal Reference Value

1 +24V 23.5~26V
2 +24V 23.5~26V
3 +5V 4.75~5.25V
4 +12V 11.4~12.6V
5 GND /
6 GND /
7 GND /
8 GND /
 Connector (J20) for transmitting control signal of main control board: 40-pin, TTL,
used for transmitting a control signal.
Connectors for debugging:
JTAG connector (J2): 10-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
Drive control connectors:

6 Hardware Circuits
 Valve driving connector (J6): 8-pin, used for driving interior pump and interior wash
valve of sample/reagent probe.
 Valve driving connector (J9): 8-pin, used for driving phase-1\2\3\4 waste pump,
deionized water and wash solution dispense valves, and mixer exterior valve.
 Sample/reagent carousel motor driving connector (J15): 4-pin, used for driving the
sample/reagent carousel motor.
 Reaction carousel motor driving connector (J16): 4-pin, used to drive reaction
carousel motor.
 Sample/reagent horizontal motor driving connector (J5): 4-pin, used for driving the
sample/reagent horizontal motor.
 Sample/reagent vertical motor driving connector (J13): 4-pin, used for driving the
sample/reagent vertical motor.
 Sample/reagent syringe motor driving connector (J8): 4-pin, used for driving the
sample/reagent syringe motor.
 Deionized water syringe motor driving connector (J11): 4-pin, used for driving the
deionized water syringe motor.
 Wash solution syringe motor driving connector (J12): 4-pin, used for driving the
wash solution syringe motor.
 Wash station motor driving connector (J4): 4-pin, used for driving the wash station
motor.
 Sample/reagent mixer horizontal motor driving connector (J10): 4-pin, used for
driving the sample/reagent mixer horizontal motor.
 Sample/reagent mixer vertical motor driving connector (J14): 4-pin, used for driving
the sample/reagent mixer vertical motor.
 Mixer motor driving connector (J22): 2-pin, used to drive the mixer motor.
 Reagent preheating driving connector (J24): 2-pin, used for driving the reagent
preheater.
Indicators
The power drive board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
Test points

6 Hardware Circuits
In the following positions of the power drive board can signal tests be performed.

 24V: 24V power supply input. Normal range: 23.5 - 26V.
NOTE:
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J20 and J17. Hold the PCBA
by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being
deformed or damaged.
6.4.4 AD collection board

The AD collection board is intended to implement the following functions:
 Adjusting gains of 12 photoelectric signals via a digital potentiometer.

 Controlling the channel selection switch to switch among 12 channel signals at
different time.
 Converting photoelectric analog signals into digital signals via an AD converter and
then outputting the signals.
The figure below shows the relation between the AD collection board and other PCBAs.
Figure 6.9 Relation between AD collection board and other PCBAs
Preamplifier
board
AD collection
board
Main Control
Board

6 Hardware Circuits
The functional diagram of the AD collection board is shown below.
Figure 6.10 Functional diagram of AD collection board
Preamplifier
board
Single analog signal gain

adjustment
Main Control
Board
ADC
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the AD collection board is shown below.
Figure 6.11 PCB layout of AD collection board
Connectors
The AD collection board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:

6 Hardware Circuits
Power supply output connector (J1): 6-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power
supplies for the preamplifier board and receive optical and electric signals from the
preamplifier board.

1 Signal 0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)
2 +12V 11.4~12.6V
3 GND /
4 GND /
5 GND /
6 -12V -11.4~-12.6V
Main control board connector (P1): 25-pin, used for communication with the main
control board.
Indicators
The AD collection board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
 +12V power supply indicator (D5): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V
power supply has been connected.
 -12V power supply indicator (D4): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the -12V
 +5V power supply indicator (D3): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V
Test points
In the following positions of the AD collection board can signal tests be performed.
 VIN: Optical/electric signal output Normal range: varies with the signal strength and
lies between 0-5V.
 VPP: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V±5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
 VSS: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -12V±5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.
 VCC: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.
 AVCC: analog +5V power supply. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.
 DVCC: digital +5V power supply. Normal range: 5V±5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.
NOTE:

6 Hardware Circuits
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J1. Hold the PCBA by its
edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from being deformed or
damaged.
After connecting P1 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides
of it.
6.4.5 Pre-amplification Board

The pre-amplification board is intended to implement the following functions:
 Converting optical signals into electric signals via a photodiode array.

 With the help of the back circuit, filtering signals and transmitting them to the AD
collection board after amplification.
The figure below shows the relation between the pre-amplification board and other
PCBAs.
Figure 6.12 Relation between pre-amplification board and other PCBAs
Optical signal
ADC collection
Preamplifier board
board
The functional diagram of the pre-amplification board is shown below.
Figure 6.13 Functional diagram of preamplifier board
Optical signal
PDA
Signal filtering and amplification
ADC collection
board

6 Hardware Circuits
Description
PCB layout
The preamplifier board layout of the main control board is shown below.
Figure 6.14 PCB layout of preamplifier board
Connectors
The pre-amplification board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input connector (2): 1-pin, used to provide +12V power supplies for the
preamplifier board.
Power supply input connector (6): 1-pin, used to provide -12V power supplies for the
preamplifier board.
Power supply input connector (3): 1-pin, used to ground the preamplifier board.

6 Hardware Circuits
Preamplifier board signal output connector (1): 1-pin, used to transmit 1 optical/electric
analog signal.

Since encapsulated inside the Optical measurement assembly, the preamplifier board
should be maintained together with the Optical measurement assembly rather than
maintained independently.
6.4.6 Level sense board

The BS-240 level sense board is used to sense the sample/reagent fluid level, and
primarily implements the following functions:
 Sensing the reagent/sample levels; detecting the fluid level steadily and reliably,
especially allowing the sample/reagent probe to correctly detecting the fluid level
inside reaction cuvettes.
 Outputting level sense signals to the main control board when the probe contacts the
fluid level.
 Detecting vertical collision, and outputting the detection signal to the main control
board.
The functional diagram of the level sense board is shown below.
Figure 6.15 Functional diagram of level sense board
Vertical
collision
circuit
Dual
tube Capacity Connect Main
probe detection CPU or Control
chip circuit Board
Description
PCB layout
The top layer of the level sense board is shown below.

6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.16 Level detection board PCB
Connectors
The level sense board contains the following connectors.
Probe connector (J1): 2-pin, used for connecting the sample/reagent probes with related
circuit.
Pin No. Signal

1 GND
2 Probe capacitor
signal input
Power supply and signal output connector (J2): 4-pin, used to provide power supply for
the level sense board and output the level sense signal and vertical collision signal.

1 GND /
2 Vertical High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical
collision signal collision occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output
output when vertical collision happens.
3 Level sense Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to
signal output detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is
output when the probe detects the fluid level.
4 +12V 11.4~12.6V
Serial port communication cable connector (J3): 3-pin, used for communication between
the level sense board and the control drive board.
Pin No. Signal

1 RXD
2 RST
3 TXD
Indicators
The level sense board contains the following indicators.
 Level sense indicator (D5): green. It is extinguished when the probe fails to detect
the fluid level, and vice versa.
 Vertical collision indicator (D1): green. It is extinguished when no vertical collision
occurs, and vice versa.

6 Hardware Circuits
 Level sense board operation indicator (D2): yellow. The level sense board operation
indicator is blinking when the board works normally, and is always lit when strong
interference is detected.
Test points
In the following positions of the level sense board can signal tests be performed.
 LEVEL: level sense signal output. Normal condition: Low level (about 0V) is output
when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is output when
the probe detects the fluid level.
 GND: grounding terminal of the level sense board.
 5V: 5V power supply of the level sense board, with a normal range of 4.75 - 5.25V.
 3.3V: 3.3V power supply of the level sense board, with a normal range of 2.97 - 3.63V.
 RAM: vertical collision signal output. Normal condition: High level (about 4V) is
output when no vertical collision occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output when
vertical collision happens.
NOTE:
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the
PCBA.
It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
6.4.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board

The reagent refrigeration board is relatively independent in the entire hardware system
and has the following major functions:
 Refrigeration control and drive: controlling the switch of the heatsinks and
refrigerating the reagent compartment to keep the temperature within certain range.
 Control of cooling fans and demisting.
The functional diagram of the reagent refrigeration board is shown below.

6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.17 Functional diagram of reagent refrigeration board
Temperature sensor
Reagent
Temperature
refrigeration Refrigeration
indication 2 Peltiers
board control circuit
circuit
2 Peltier radiating fans
6 reserved system radiating

Voltage conversion fans
12 V circuit
1 lamp radiating fan

12VFAN
1 power drive board
radiating fan
Antifogging circuit
1 reserved radiating fan
Reaction carousel fan

Main Control Photoelectric 4 reaction carousel
feedback signal
Board coupling temperature control fans
processing circuit
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the reagent refrigeration board is shown below.
Figure 6.18 Reagent refrigeration board PCB
Connectors
The reagent refrigeration board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:

6 Hardware Circuits
Power supply input connectors (J86): providing refrigeration F12V and refrigeration
B12V for the PCBAs.
Pin No. Signal Reference Description

Value
1 F12V 11.4~12.6V 12V power supply input for
4 GND 0 cooling fans.
2, 3 B12V 11.4~12.6V Refrigeration power supply

5, 6 FGND / input: used for loading the
corresponding Peltiers
J89_1 and J89_2.
Peltier connectors (J4-J7): providing power supply for the Peltiers.
Connector Pin No. Signal Reference Value

J89_1 1 1 Peltier 0V for ON and 12V for OFF.
2 12V

J89_2 1 2 Peltier 0V for ON and 12V for OFF.
2 12V
Demisting circuit connector (J15): providing power supply for the demisting heater.

J9 1 1 demisting 11.4~12.6V
2 heaters /
3 /
4 0
Reagent refrigeration fan connectors (J84, J85): providing a power supply for the reagent
refrigeration 12V fan.

J84 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
J85 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
Temperature sensor connector (J88): checking temperature of the refrigeration

compartment and refrigeration board.

6 Hardware Circuits
Connector Pin No. Signal Reference

Value
J88 1 GND 0V
2 Temperature sensor signal /
of the refrigeration
compartment
PCBA radiating fan connector (J75): providing a 12V power supply for the PCBA
radiating fan.

J75 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
Whole unit radiating fan connector (J81): providing a 12V power supply for the whole
unit radiating fan.

J81 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
Lamp radiating fan connector (J73): providing a 12V power supply for the lamp radiating
fan.

J73 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
Reaction carousel constant-temperature fan connectors (J76, J77): providing a 12V

power supply for the fan that keeps temperature of the reaction carousel.

J76 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
J77 1 GND /
2 FAN 11.4~12.6V
Indicators
The reagent refrigeration board includes the following indicators.
Power supply:

6 Hardware Circuits
No. Description Color Introduction

D45 C24V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
power supply works normally.
D48 VCC Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
D47 B12V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
D49 VDD Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
D46 F12V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
Indicators to indicate PCBA functions:
No. Description Color Introduction

D15 Fan power supply Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
indicator refrigeration board is working.
D3 Refrigeration power Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
supply indicator refrigeration board is working.
D4 Indicating the reagent Red When the reagent compartment
compartment temperature exceeds the high
temperature limit
D6 Indicating the reagent Green When the reagent compartment
compartment temperature is within the target
temperature range
D5 Indicating the reagent Yellow When the reagent compartment
compartment temperature is lower than the low
temperature limit
D7 Indicating status of Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
the peltier peltier is working.

 Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and
wear a pair of anti-static gloves or wrist straps.
 Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.
 Check the connectors with locks and ensure they have been locked properly.
 Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.
NOTE:
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the
PCBA.

6 Hardware Circuits
It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

6 Hardware Circuits
6.5 Power Supply System
6.5.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit

Figure 6.19 Power supply system of the whole unit
Connected
E yellow to housing Analyzer Switch
green Main Power Switch
L brown L brown L
Power jack Power
N light blue N light blue supply
N
board
Power supply board

The power supply board, as the major part of the entire power supply system, provides
power supply for the lamp, DC power supply for major control boards, and power supply
for refrigeration modules. For details, see the figure below:
Figure 6.20 Power supply board
A12V/2A Lamp
5V Analog +/-12V Analog +/-12V

Power supply board
Analog Power
5V/4A Main Control AD collection Preamplifier
Supply Conversion
Board board board
Board
12V/5A
Power drive board
24V/6A
Power Supply
Conversion ISE module
Board
12V/11A
Reagent
refrigeration
board
6.5.2 Performance Indices
Power supply input

 AC voltage input: 220-240V, 220/230V, and 110/115V.
 AC voltage frequency: 50/60±1Hz
 AC input power: 1KVA
Power supply output

No Name Rated Output Usage Control Description
1 5V 5V/4A 5V digital Controlled by analyzer
power switch

6 Hardware Circuits
2 12V 12V/2A Lamp Controlled by operating

software
3 12V 12V/11A Reagent Controlled by main
refrigeration power switch
4 12V 12V/5A 12V drive Controlled by analyzer
power switch
5 24V 24V/6A 24V drive and Controlled by analyzer
heater power switch
NOTE:
 Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled by the
operating software while the main power switch and analyzer power switch are
turned on.
 Control by analyzer power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the
analyzer power switch with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned
on.
 Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when
the analyzer power switch is turned on, and vice versa.
6.5.3 Power supply board

Functions and principles are described below.
The PCB layout of the power supply board is shown below.

6 Hardware Circuits
Figure 6.21 PCB layout of power supply board
Indication of voltage outputs:
LED Indication Status Controlled By

L12V When L12V is lit, it indicates that the Controlled by
lamp outputs a 12V power. operating software
D5V When D5V is lit, it indicates that the Controlled by analyzer
PCBA outputs a 5V power. power switch
B12V When B12V is lit, it indicates that the Controlled by main
reagent refrigerator outputs a 12V power switch
power.
P12V When P12V is lit, it indicates that the Controlled by analyzer
lamp outputs a 12V power. power switch
P24V When P24V is lit, it indicates that the Controlled by analyzer
PCBA outputs a 24V power. power switch

6 Hardware Circuits
NOTE:
 Control by operating software means that the lamp is controlled by the operating
software while the main power switch and analyzer power switch are turned on.
 Control by analyzer power switch means that the power supply is controlled by the
analyzer power switch with the prerequisite that the main power switch is turned
on.
 Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally when
the analyzer power switch is turned on, and vice versa.
Output connectors:
No. Pins Output Description

J1 1 AC input L
3 AC input N
J2 1 12VOUT
2 Analyzer Switch
3 Ground (Analyzer Switch)
J3 1 deionized water Heater (220V)
12
2 Wash solution heater (220V)
5
3 Upper heater of reaction carousel
(220V)
10
7 Lower heater of reaction carousel
(220V)
9
4 /
6 /
8 /
11 /
J4 1 Lamp ground
2 Ground
3 Ground
4 Ground
5 Ground
6 Ground
7 Ground
8 Ground
9 Ground
10 Ground

6 Hardware Circuits
No. Pins Output Description

11 12V output of lamp
12 12V output of reagent refrigeration
13 12V output of reagent refrigeration
14 24V output of driving
19 5V output
20 5V output
J5 1 Control input of deionized water heater
2 Control input of wash solution heater
3 Control input of reaction carousel
heater
4 Ground
5 Control input of inlet valve
6 Ground
7 Control input of SV07 dispense valve
8 Ground
9 Reserved
10 Ground
11 Lamp control input
12 Ground
J6 1 Driving output of inlet valve

2
3 Driving output of SV07 dispense valve
4
5 Reserved
6
J7 1 Radiating fan
2
3 Radiating fan
4

6 Hardware Circuits

6 Hardware Circuits
6.6 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RE APPR
ECN DESCRIPTION DRAW CHECHK
V DATE
D D
Power
Heater voltage
supply
selection board
board
C C
Reagent
Main Control Power drive
refrigeration
Board board
board
AD collection
board
B B
MINDRAY
APPROVALS DATE
DESIGN
CHECK
A TITLE Host (220V) cabling A
CHECK diagram
File: Bytes: CONFIDENTIAL DISCLOSURE: This set of drawing(s) and all it's intellectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting CHECK
herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No use, copies or reproductions should be made
of this drawing or any part(s) thereof for whatever purpose nor shall any information, data, calculations, or other contents
DWG NO. BA10 REV 1.1
Date: Time:
contained in this drawing be disseminated without prior written permission of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics R&D
Co.,Ltd.
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 CHIEF ENG. SHEET 1 OF9 SIZE A4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Cables
Cablesfrom
frompower
powerjack
Wash Solution Heater

jack
protection switch on
Heater temperature
Heater temperature
Heater on reaction
protection switch
protection switch
protection switch
Deionized Water
to
topower
powerswitch
reaction carousel
reaction carousel
switch
Dionized water
Water inlet valve

under reaction
Wash solution
Reserved pump
temperature
temperature
Heater under
Reserved valve
EEyellow
yellowgreen
green
carousel
carousel
Housing
Housingground
Heater
ground
Main Power
Power jack Switch
M07-00061S---
D
Main
Main control
control board
board NNlight
lightblue
blue D
Main
Maincontrol
controlboard
boardcontrol
controlsignal
signal LLbrown
brown
J16 cable
cable J5
12
J5
2
5
J3
10
55blue
J3
7
9
11PV1CTRL
PV1CTRL blue 1 2 3 4 5 6
22PV2CTRL 77black
black 5 1
PV2CTRL
2
J14
J14
33PV3CTRL 99yellow
yellow
PV3CTRL 6 2 J1
J1
4
44GND 44red
red 11brown
brown LL
GND 1
6
7 3
55220VCTRL1
220VCTRL1 11blue
blue AC
ACpower
powersupply
supplycables
cablesfrom
from
8
66220VCTRL2
220VCTRL2 22black
black 8 4 2 power
powerswitch
switchto
toPFC
PFCboard
board
and
and24V
24Vboard
34
board
33
77GND
GND 66yellow
yellow 9 10 N
3 33light blue N
lightblue
88220VCTRL3
220VCTRL3 33red
red
15
15GND
GND 88yellow
yellow 11 12
20
20GND
GND 10
10red
red
99LAMPCTRL
LAMPCTRL 11
11yellow
yellow
12
12GND
GND 12
12black
black J4
J4
Main
Maincontrol
controlboard
board
12V&5V
12V&5Vpower
powercord
cord
J2
J2 12GND
12GND 66 88blue
blue 11 1 Power
Power supply
supply board
board
4 1 GND
GND 44 10
10black
black
12V
12V 33 18
18yellow
yellow
C 5 2 C
5V
5V 11 20
20red
red
6 3 12 2 1 1 12Vout NO
Drive
Driveboard
boardpower
powercord
cord J2 2
Power
Power drive
drive board
board BA10-20-78108
BA10-20-78108
3 3 blue C
13 3
5V
5V 33 19
19red
red
J17
J17
GND
GND77 99black
black + Analyzer Switch
2 6
12V
12V 44 17
17yellow
yellow
14 4
12GND
12GND 88 77blue
blue 2 black GND
1 5
24V
24V 11 15
15orange
orange
3 4 24V
24V 22 14
14orange
orange 15 5
GND
GND 66 55white
white
GND
GND 55 44white
white
7 8
16 6
Refrigeration
Refrigerationboard
board12V
12V
power
powerpatch
patchcord
cord Refrigeration
Refrigerationboard
board12V
12Vpower
powercord
cord
17 7
J86
J86
66 B12V
B12V 33 12
12yellow
yellow
55 B12V
B12V 22 13
13yellow
yellow 8 B
B 18
44 GND
GND 66 33blue
blue
GND
GND 55 22blue
blue
33
GND
GND 44 66white
white 19 9
22
C12V
C12V11 16
16orange
orange
11
ISE
ISE power
power supply
supply PCBA
PCBA
ISE
ISEmodule
module
33yellow
yellow12V
12V
1124V
24V 3
1
22GND 2
GND
2 11blue
1 blueGND
GND
J1
J1 J2
J2
M32: 20 10
M32:lamp
lamp
11black
black
MINDRAY
22black
black
12VGND
12VGND
11
11red
red
11red
red
LAMP12V
LAMP12V A
A
Power Supply System Cabling
TITLE: Diagram
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. REV 1.1

Date: Time:
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 2 OF 9 SIZE A4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
C31: Sample probe
PROBE
GND
1 black
2 red
D
D
Sample probe level
BA30-20-06546
detection cable
1 black
2 red
J4 J5
J5
BNC BNC BNC
Power drive
10
1
4
2
1
J66 1 2
board
Dionized water blank sensor

Diluted wash solution blank
J20
9
(Sample probe) level
High-concentration
waste sensor
sense board PCBA
12 11
18 17
28 27
32 31
38 37
42 41
22 21
48 47
14 13
16 15
20 19
24 23
26 25
30 29
34 33
36 35
40 39
44 43
46 45
50 49
1
9
sensor
black
yellow
red
22black
black
blue
55yellow
yellow
J65
44red
red
yellow
red
11black
yellow
33blue
blue
red
88yellow
66red
77yellow
3 yellow
11red
1 blue
88yellow
99blue
4 red
11red
2 black
2
11
11
1 2 3 4
signal
controlsignal
Cables from main control board to
4 NC
5 NC
7 NC
2 NC
3 NC
6 NC
22
44
1
boardcontrol
12V&5V power cord
Main control board
power drive board
40 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR3
39 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR3
cable
31 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR2
cable
controlboard
27 DIR_RESERVED_MOTOR1
11 VALVE_WASH_INJECT1
12 VALVE_WASH_INJECT2
38 DIR_ SYR_MOTOR2
36 DIR_ SYR_MOTOR1
Maincontrol
37 CLK_SYR_MOTOR2
35 CLK_SYR_MOTOR1
16 PWR_PV_WASH1
17 PWR_PV_WASH2
10 PUMP_FILL_OUT
13 PREHEAT_REAG
25 CLK_ WASH_UP
24 DIR_WASH_UP
44 DIR_ FILL _UP

45 CLK_FILL_SYR
9 VAVLE_FILL_IN
43 CLK_FILL_UP
8 PUMP_FILL_IN
46 DIR_FILL_SYR
32 CLK_STIR_UP
33 DIR_STIR_UP
2 yellow LEVEL1
15 LAMP_CTRL
41 CLK_FILL_R
42 DIR_FILL_R
23 DIR_ STIR_R
220VCTRL1
220VCTRL2
220VCTRL3
22 CLK_STIR_R
28 CLK_FILL_T
55220VCTRL1
66220VCTRL2
88220VCTRL3
Main
29 DIR_FIIL_T
20 REAC-CLK
21 REAC-DIR
4 red LEVEL2
PV3CTRL
14 STIR_DC
PV1CTRL
PV2CTRL
18 RELAY_T
33PV3CTRL
11PV1CTRL
22PV2CTRL
1 white GND
3 blue GND
6 12GND
4 GND
19 GND
GND
1 VCC
34 GND
47 GND
GND
3 12V
50 VCC
44GND
48 VCC
49 VCC
77GND
5V
5V
5V
1 GND
335V
5V
345V
335V
345V
4 NC
5 NC
7 NC
3 NC
6 NC
2 NC
33
34
33
34
NC
NC
NC
NC
22
44
NC
NC
3
J14 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4
4
6
5
12 11
18 17
28 27
32 31
38 37
42 41
22 21
48 47
14 13
16 15
20 19
24 23
26 25
30 29
34 33
36 35
40 39
44 43
46 45
50 49
2 4 6
9
8 34
J1
J16
C C
1 3 5 33
4
7
1
3
2
J11
J2
Main control board
J39
J5 J6 J7
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J23 J22 J21
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 22 24 26 28 J18
18 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 10
J12 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 J13 13 15 19 23 25 27 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
1 3 5 7 9 11 17 21 29 31 33 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 9
3 2 1
3
2 black
3 red
Reagent preheating sensor patch

Cable 1 from main control board to Cable 2 from main control board to
3 PRTD_T1
Patch cord from main control board to ISE
2 PRTD_REF
position sensor position sensor PC communications
module
SENSOR
SENSOR
Reaction carousel temperature
SHIELD
SHIELD
1 red VCC 1 patch cord
+ 4 white PHO_REAC_T 2 1 red VCC 1
C13: reaction carousel
REF
REF
C 2 black C16:sample/reagent + 4 white PHO_FILL_T 2
home position sensor GND 3 1 NC NC 1
- carousel C 2 black GND 3 PC COM
E 3 green GND 4
sensor cable
- Cable between main control board
cord
1 red VCC home position sensor 3 green GND 4 3 RXD 2 1
+ 5 E and AD board
4 white PHO_REAC_TC 6 1 red VCC 5 2 TXD 3 NC
Reaction Carousel Coder C C15:sample/reagent +
4 white PHO_FILL_TC 6
Sensor - 2 black GND 7 C 4 NC NC 4 2
3 green GND 8 carousel - 2 black GND 7 RXD232
E 1 VCC Red 1
1 red VCC 9 coder sensor 3 green GND 8 ISE module 5 GND 5 3
Black1
+ E
Red 2
PHO_FILTER_MOTOR
4 white 10 1 red VCC 9 TXD232
10 DCP_CLK
+
Black
C
11 DCP_DIN
2 RXD Green 3
18 AD_BUSY
Red
C40: filter wheel PHO_WASH_UP 10 6 NC NC 6
19 AD_CLK
2 black GND 11 4 white
9 DCP_EN
4
6 AD_DIN
- C
20 AD_RC
22 CH_A2
23 CH_A1
24 CH_A0
home position sensor B
21 CH_A3
17 15GND
3 TXD Blue 2
4 15GND
B E 3 green GND 12 Standby - 2 black GND 11 8 RTS 7 NC
12 GND
25 GND
13 GND
14 +15V
1 +15V
5 GND
15 -15V
16 VCC
7 GND
8 GND
1 red VCC
2 -15V
13 12
3 VCC
+ E 3 green GND 5 GND Black 4 5
C18: sample vertical 4 white PHO_FILL_UP 14 1 red VCC 13 7 CTS 8
C + GND
movement motor 4 white PHO_WASH_SUCKSYR 14 6 RTS White 10
- 2 black GND 15
Preheating Sensor
C 9 NC 6
3
temperature sensor
Standby
Reagent bar code reader

home position sensor 2 black GND 15
E 3 green GND 16
M29: Reagent
- 7 CTS Yellow 6 NC carousel
1 red VCC 17 E 3 green GND 16
C17: sample probe rotation + 4 white PHO_FILL_R 7 C29: reaction
18 1 red VCC 17 8 TRIG Orange 9
motor C + ISP_RESET
- 2 black GND 19 Cuvette wash station 4 white PHO_WASH_EJECT 18
home position sensor C 9 NC NC 5 8 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Deionized water temperature sensor cable

E 3 green GND 20 anti-collision - 2 black GND P1
Wash solution temperature sensor cable

1 red VCC 21 3 green GND 20 NC 7 NC
+ E 4 NC
C19: sample syringe motor C 4 white PHO_FILL_SYR 22 1 red VCC 21 9
+ NC 8
4 white PHO_RESERVED1 22 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
home position sensor - 2 black GND 23
Wash Station Home Position C
3 green GND 24 - 2 black GND 23 NC 11 10
E
VCC 25 E 3 green GND 24 NC
+ NC 12
C28: mixer vertical 4 white PHO_STIR_UP 26 + VCC 25 AD collection board BA10-30-77759
C SHIELD
- 2 black 27 4 white PHO_RESERVED2 26
syring
GND
water
positi
NC 13
home
Dioni
movement motor C
zed
on
E 3 green 28 2 black GND 27

e
home position sensor GND -

1 red VCC 29 3 green GND 28 NC 14
+ E
C27: mixer rotation motor 4 white PHO_STIR_R 30 1 red VCC 29
C + NC 15
4 white PHO_RESERVED3 30
home position sensor - 2 black GND 31 Wash Solution Syringe C
3 green GND 32 Home Position - 2 black GND 31
E
33 NC E 3 green GND 32
34 NC 33 NC
34 NC
MINDRAY
A A
TITLE: Main control board cabling diagram
File: Bytes:
Date: Time:
SHEET 3 OF 9 SIZE A2
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
M19: Mixer DC motor
2
Power supply
phase 2/3 aspiration pump

phase 1 aspiration pump
preheating block
P04: phase 4 aspiration

12&5V board
SV05: Dionized water
SV03: Sample Probe
SV02: interior valve

SV04: Mixer Exterior
P01: interior pump

SV06: Wash Solution
M29: Reagent
Power supply 24V board
Exterior Valve
Dispense Valve
dispense valve
Valve
P02:
P352
pump
P03:
0
P350
P403
4 3 2 1
3 4
D D
- +
Power drive board power cord

2 white
1 white
4 orange
3 orange
2 black
2
1 blue
4 red
1
3 yellow
2
Patch cord from drive board

Patch cord from drive board
to three-probe board mixer
to three-probe board
preheater
motor
24V 1
24V 2
12V 4
12GND 8
VCC 3
GND 5
GND 6
GND 7
1 black
yellow
5 blue
6 red
2 red
4 red
3
2 red
1 blue
1 blue
2 red
Syringe motor cable 1 2 1 2 7 5 3 1 7 5 3 1 1 2 3 4
6 white 4 white 8 6 4 2 8 6 4 2 J17 8

6 5 6 7
1
J22 J24
4 4 yellow 3 yellow J9 J6 Cables from main control board to

1 2
2
power board
DGND 12V
1 2
GND 24V
GND 24V
Bla
ck
GND 5V
J8
3 3 blue 2 blue 3 4
3
R
d
2 e
1 GND 1GND
3 4
1
1 1 red 1 red 2 NC 2 NC 5 6
3 NC 3 NC
4
Reagent probe vertical 5 6 4 NC 4 NC 7 8
movement motor cable 5 NC 5 NC
C 7 8 6 NC 6 NC C
6 white 4 white 7 NC 7 NC 9 4
1
6
9 4 8 PUMP_FILL_IN 8
4 yellow 3 yellow 9 VAVLE_FILL_IN 9 11 12
4
2
10 PUMP_FILL_OUT 10
J13
11 12 11 VALVE_WASH_INJECT1 11 13 14
3 3 blue 2 blue 12 VALVE_WASH_INJECT2 12
3
13 14 13 PREHEAT_REAG 13
14 STIR_DC 14 15 16
1 red 1 red 15 LAMP_CTRL 15
1 15 16
4
16 CLK_WASH_SYR 37 17 18
17 DIR_WASH_SYR 38
Filter wheel motor 17 18 18 RELAY_T 18 19 20
patch cord 19 GND 19
19 20 20 REAC-CLK 20 J40
6 white 00 4 white 21 22
Main control board

6 Power drive board 21 REAC-DIR 21
21 22 22 CLK_STIR_R 22
5 yellow 3 yellow 23 DIR_ STIR_R 23 23 24
4
2
J20 23 24 24 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR1 24
25 DIR_RESERVED_MOTOR1 25 25 26
J7
3 2 blue 2 blue 26 CLK_WASH_UP 26
25 26
3
27 DIR_WASH_UP 27 27 28
1 red 28 CLK_FILL_T 28
1 1 red 27 28 29 DIR_FIIL_T 29
4
30 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR2 30 29 30
Reagent probe rotation motor 29 30 31 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR2 31
cable 32 CLK_STIR_UP 32 31 32
6 white 4 white 31 32 33 DIR_STIR_UP 33
1
6 34 GND 34 33 34
35 CLK_SYR_MOTOR1 35
4 yellow 3 yellow 33 34 36 DIR_ SYR_MOTOR1 36
4 2 35 36
37 CLK_RESERVED_MOTO4 16
3 3 blue 2 blue J5 35 36 38 DIR_RESERVED_MOTO4 17
37 38
39 CLK_RESERVED_MOTOR3 39
3
37 38 40 DIR_ RESERVED_MOTOR3 40
1 1 red 1 red 41 CLK_FILL_R 41 39 40 B
B 42 DIR_FILL_R 42
4
39 40 43 CLK_FILL_UP 43
44 DIR_ FILL _UP 44 41 42
Exterior Wash Syringe 41 42 45 CLK_FILL_SYR 45
46 DIR_FILL_SYR 46 43 44
6 white 4 white
1
6 43 44 47 GND 47
48 VCC 48 45 46
4 yellow 3 yellow 49 VCC 49
45 46
2
4 50 VCC
J11
47 48
3 3 blue 2 blue 47 48
3
49 50
1 red 49 50
1 1 red
4
J12 J15 J4 J10 J16 J14
4 3 2 1 Reagent carousel motor cable 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
3 yellow
3 yellow
4 white
3 yellow
4 white
3 yellow
3 yellow
4 white
4 white
3 yellow
4 white
2 blue
2 blue
4 white
1 red
2 blue
1 red
2 blue
2 blue
1 red
movement motor cable

1 red
2 blue
Wash solution syringe
1 red
1 red
Reaction carousel
motor patch cord
Mixer rotation
Mixer vertical
motor cable
motor cable
station motor
Cuvette wash
MINDRAY
4 yellow
6 white
4 yellow
4 yellow
4 yellow
4 yellow
3 blue
6 white
6 white
6 white
4 yellow
1 red
6 white
6 white
3 blue
3 blue
3 blue
1 red
1 red
1 red
3 blue
1 red
3 blue
1 red
A A
6
1
6
1
6
1
TITLE:
1
Power drive board connection diagram
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. BA23 REV 1
Date: Time:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
Preamplifier board
BA10-30-77760
AGND_SHILED
340nm
AGND
AGND
+15V
-15V
1
2
3
4
6
5
preamplifier board
collection board to
Cables from AD
C C
2 4 6
J1
1 3 5
AD collection board
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P1
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
3
B B
Cable between main control board and

AD board
10 DCP_CLK
18 AD_BUSY
11 DCP_DIN
19 AD_CLK
9 DCP_EN
6 AD_DIN
20 AD_RC
22 CH_A2
23 CH_A1
24 CH_A0
17 15GND
21 CH_A3
4 15GND
14 +15V
12 GND
25 GND
13 GND
1 +15V
5 GND
15 -15V
7 GND
8 GND
16 VCC
2 -15V
3 VCC
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
J39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
A
Main Control Board MINDRAY A
TITLE: AD collection board cabling diagram
File： Bytes：
Date： Time：
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6 Hardware Circuits
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M42-M43: refrigeration 92 fan

C35: reagent refrigeration temperature
sensor
D Demisting D
Demisting temperatur
GND
GND
GND
12V
12V
12V
Reagent refrigeration temperature sensor patch
GND
heater e protection
Reagent refrigeration/radiating fan cable

12V
switch
Rear panel fan patch cord
Demisting heater cable

reserved
cord
1 GND
4 +5V
2 12V
2 12V
2 12V
1 GND
1 GND
1 GND
3
J88 1 2 J81 1 2 J79 1 2 J80 1 2 J78 1 2 J82 1 2 J83 1 2 J84 1 2 J85 1 2 1 2 3 4
J15
J89 Power supply 12&5V board
J86
PELTIER cable 1 P353
6 1
C 1 12V blue C
12V 1
1 4 5 2 4 1
12VFANGNDFAN
blue
M30-M31:PELTIER
2 3
GND 2 COOLER 4 whit
Reagent 2 5
12V GND e
PELTIER cable 2 refrigeration 4 5 2
1 board 3 yello
12V 3 6 w
12V 12V GND 5
1 2 yello
2 w
GND 6 6 3
COOLER 1 oran
2
ge
Refrigeration board 12V

Refrigeration board 12V
power patch cord
power cord
J74 1 2 3 J73 1 2 3 1 2 3 J71 1 2 3 J75 1 2 J76 1 2 J77 1 2 J87 1 2 3

J72
Temperature control chamber fan patch cord
5V
GND
FAN
2 12V
1 GND
1 GND
1 GND
2 12V
2 12V
Feedback patch cord from

FAN4
FAN3
Lamp box radiating fan patch cord
refrigeration board fan

12VFAN
main control board to

refrigeration board and
GNDFAN
GNDFAN
Cable between reagent

12VFAN
B B
PCB fan
12V
12V
GND
GND
12V
12V
GND
12V
12V
12V
GND
GND
GND
GND
FAN
FAN
J10
Temperature control chamber fan cable

Power drive board Main control board
Lamp box fan cable
radiating fan BA30-30-77755
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Reagent refrigeration board cabling diagram
File: Bytes:
DWG NO. A-BA20-30-75232 REV 1.1
Date: Time:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

7 Hydropneumatic System

7.1 Overview
7.1 Overview
The major function of the hydraulic part is:
 To provide deionized water for washing interior/exterior of probes and mixers via
the water supply unit.
 To provide deionized water and wash solution for washing cuvettes via the cuvette
wash station.
 To provide the whole unit with deionized water via the deionized water tank and to
discharge waste liquid via the drainage module.
This chapter describes the working principles and repairing methods of the BS-240's
hydropneumatic system.

7.2 Fluidic Diagram
7.2 Fluidic Diagram

Figure 7.1 Fluidic Diagram

7.2 Fluidic Diagram
Tube label
SV02 T10
Deionized water
D06 D07 Low-concentration waste

6 Reagent Reaction High-concentration waste Optional
T103 T104 T10

7 NS MIX Carouse Carouse
SY03 ZQ01
T105 ZQ11
ZQ21
ZQ31
D05 T61
SV03 T222 3
T221 D32 D33 D34

ZQ12
SI1 SI2 SI3 SI4
SV04 T61 T70
T612
1 2
T211 D22 D23 T212 D24 ZQ32 ZQ13 ZQ02

D31
T312
P04 P03 P02
W21 W31
D21 W01 W11
ZZ33 ZZ34
T30 ZZ24
SV05 ZZ23 5
SV07 ZZ08
ZZ32 ZQ33 ZQ14 ZQ03
ZZ22
T52 T311 T30
1 T511
P01 W02 W22
4
ZZ21 T404 T405
ZZ31
1 2 3
T303
ZZ05
T204 T502 ZZ07 T602
D04 SV06
ZZ12
D16 ZZ04
CAN02 ZZ06
ZQ15
ZZ11
T203 T301 T302
D11
SY02
T202 D12
T40
T10
SV01 T40
2 3
2 CAN01
D15 T201 D14 D13
D03
W03
SY01
ZZ03
Panel
D02 T101 ZZ02 T401 T60 T701
T501
1
FL01 W04 ZQ16 ZQ04
FL02
D01 ZZ01 FS03
FS01
FS02
V01 V02 V03 (optional) V04

7.2 Fluidic Diagram
Fluidic Port Panel
Low-conc. Low-conc.
DI water Dil Detergent waste outlet1 waste outlet2 High-conc. waste
inlet inlet outlet
High-
Dionized Diluted wash concentration
water low solution low waste high
level sensor level sensor level sensor
FL02 FL04
FL03
FL01
Dil Detergent tank High-conc. waste tank

(CAN2) (CAN10)

7.2 Fluidic Diagram
Analyzing Unit
Sensor
Tube
DI water tank
waste
concentration
Low-
solution tank
Wash
waste
concentration
High-
Table 7.1 Silicone tube lengths and identifiers
The tube length tolerance of the tube is not specified: when the tube length ≤ 100mm, the tolerance is ±5mm; when the tube length >
100mm, the tolerance is ±10mm.

7.2 Fluidic Diagram
Tube label Rubber hose Type Part No. Actual Number Tube Remark
length of Labels Label type
D03 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU polyether 082-002374-00 220 1 PVC hose Assembling fluidic
8mm outlet assembly
8mm outlet assembly
D05 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU polyether 082-002374-00 350 1 PVC hose
8mm
D06 Rubber M6G-020049--- 320 / /
hose .PTFEID1.5mmXOD2.5mm×100M
D07 Rubber hose .PTFE,0.040"IDX0.066"OD 0040-10-32301 2300 / / Assembling reagent
preheating assembly
8mm outlet assembly
D12 Rubber hose .3/32"X5/32",ND-100- M90-100071--- 50 1 PVC hose Assembling fluidic
65,Tygon 7mm outlet assembly
D13 Rubber hose .3/32"X5/32",ND-100- M90-100071--- 500 1 PVC hose
65,Tygon 7mm
D14 Rubber hose .3/32"X5/32",ND-100- M90-100071--- 50 1 PVC hose Exterior wash tubing
65,Tygon 7mm
D15 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU polyether 082-002374-00 40 1 PVC hose Exterior wash tubing
8mm
8mm
8mm
65,Tygon 7mm
D23 Rubber hose .3/32"X5/32",ND-100- M90-100071--- 50 1 PVC hose Assembling instrument
65,Tygon 7mm body assembly

7.2 Fluidic Diagram
D24 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU polyether 082-002374-00 900 2 PVC hose Assembling instrument
8mm body assembly
8mm
65,Tygon 7mm
D33 Rubber hose .3/32"X5/32",ND-100- M90-100071--- 50 1 PVC hose Assembling instrument
65,Tygon 7mm body assembly
D34 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU polyether 082-002374-00 800 2 PVC hose Assembling instrument
8mm body assembly
ZZ03 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU polyether 082-002374-00 560 2 PVC hose Assembling fluidic
8mm outlet assembly
ZZ04 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU polyether 082-002374-00 360 1 PVC hose
8mm
ZZ05 Rubber hose .3/32"X5/32",ND-100- M90-100071--- 50 1 PVC hose
65,Tygon 7mm
ZZ06 Rubber hose .3/32"X5/32",ND-100- M90-100071--- 200 1 PVC hose
65,Tygon 7mm
ZZ07 Rubber hose .3/32"X5/32",ND-100- M90-100071--- 90 1 PVC hose Assembling wash tube
65,Tygon 7mm
ZZ08 Rubber hose .1.6*3.2mm TPU polyether 082-002375-00 220 1 PVC hose Assembling wash tube
1.5mm
ZZ11 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU polyether 082-002374-00 160 1 PVC hose Exterior wash tubing
8mm
ZZ12 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU polyether 082-002374-00 200 1 PVC hose Dionized waster
8mm preheater tubing
ZZ22 Rubber hose .3/32"X5/32",ND-100- M90-100071--- 50 1 PVC hose Dionized waster
65,Tygon 7mm preheater tubing

7.2 Fluidic Diagram
65,Tygon 7mm
1.5mm
ZZ32 Rubber hose .3/32"X5/32",ND-100- M90-100071--- 50 1 PVC hose Dionized waster
65,Tygon 7mm preheater tubing
65,Tygon 7mm
1.5mm
ZQ01 Rubber hose .1.6*3.2mm TPU polyether 082-002375-00 350 1 PVC hose Assembling wash tube
1.5mm
8mm
ZQ03 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU polyether 082-002374-00 400 1 PVC hose Assembling fluidic
8mm outlet assembly
1.5mm
1.5mm
8mm
8mm outlet assembly
8mm outlet assembly
1.5mm

7.2 Fluidic Diagram
1.5mm
8mm
8mm outlet assembly
W01 Rubber hose .Φ9.525XΦ15.875 natural 082-000384-00 240 / / Assembling instrument
color PVC 55~60° body assembly
W03 Rubber hose .Φ9.525XΦ15.875 natural 082-000384-00 150 / / Assembling fluidic
color PVC 55~60° outlet assembly

7.3 Principles of Hydropneumatic System

The hydropneumatic system of the BS-240 is composed of the probe wash module,
cuvette wash station, and water supply/drainage module. See the figures below:
Figure 7.2 Principles of Hydropneumatic System
Hydropneumatic
System
Probe and Mixer Cuvette Wash Inlet/outlet

Wash Module Module module
Reaction cuvette
Reaction cuvette
Waste drainage
Mixer cleaning
Probe Wash
dispensing
aspiration
Inlet
7.3.2 Probe wash module

The probe/mixer wash module consists of: 1 sample probe, 1 mixer, 2 syringes, and 1
diaphragm pump. The sample syringe SY03 is 500μl. The probe and the mixer exterior
are washed by a 10ml syringe SY01. The probe interior is washed by the diaphragm
pump P01.
This module is used for fixed-quantity sampling and two-probe cleaning.
 Fixed-quantity sampling is realized through cooperation of the syringes, the

sampling solenoid valve SV02 and the sample probe NS with the aim of delivering
fixed-quantity reagent and sample.
 The sample probe interior is washed by a diaphragm pump.
 The probe and the mixer exterior are both washed by a 10ml syringe. The start and
end of the wash action are controlled by the exterior wash solenoid valve. A
deionized water T-valve controls the dispensing of the syringe. The volume limiter of
the syringe controls the volume of the syringe.
The schematic diagram of the probe wash module is shown below.

Figure 7.3 Schematic diagram of probe wash module
SV02 T10
D06 D07
6
T103 T104 T10
7 NS MIX
SY03
T105
D05
SV03 T222
T221 D32 D33 D34
SV04
T211 D22 D23 T212 D24

D31
D21 W01
P01
T204
D04
D16
ZZ11
T203
D11 T202 D12

T10
SV01
2
D15 T201 D14 D13
D03
SY0
1
Panel
D02 T101
FL01
7.3.3 Cuvette Wash Module

The cuvette wash unit is divided into dispense module and aspirate module, which
cooperate with each other to clean the reaction cuvettes for 4 phases, making repeated
use of cuvettes possible.
The dispense module uses a cuvette wash syringe SY02 (2.5ml) to provide diluted wash
solution (alkaline) in phase 1. In phases 2 to 3, the cuvette wash syringe SY01 (10ml)
provides deionized water. In phase 4, no liquid is injected.

The diluted wash solution provided for phase 1 is obtained by diluting the concentrated
wash solution with deionized water at the ratio of 1:10. Samples are diluted manually.
The dispense action is controlled by the exterior wash solenoid valve and adjusted by the
syringe volume limiter. The dispensed volume is the same in phase 1 to phase 3.
A diaphragm pump is used to aspirate waste, so as to discharge waste fluid and wipe the
cuvettes after cleaning. High-concentration waste is generated in phase 1, and low-
concentration waste during phases 2-4. Wipe blocks are provided to absorb the
remaining wash solution inside cuvettes during phase 4.
When aspirating fluid, the phase-4 wash probe assembly lowers into reaction cuvettes,
and then waste pump is opened so that the waste is aspirated into the external waste
container. The schematic diagram of the module is shown below.
Figure 7.4 Schematic diagram of cuvette wash unit
ZQ01
ZQ11
ZQ21
ZQ31
T613
ZQ12
SI1 SI2 SI3 SI4
T611 T612 T702
ZQ32 ZQ13 ZQ02
P04 P03 P02

T312
ZZ33 ZZ34
ZZ24
SV05 ZZ23 T305
SV07 ZZ08
ZZ32 ZQ33 ZQ14 ZQ03
ZZ22
T311
T304
ZZ21 T404 T405
ZZ31
1 2 3
T303
ZZ05
ZZ07 T602
SV06
ZZ12
ZZ04
CAN02 ZZ06
ZQ15
T203 T301 T302
T202 D12
SY02
SV01 T403
T402
D15 T201 D14 D13 CAN01
W03
SY01
ZZ03
7.3.4 Inlet/outlet module

The water supply/drainage module includes the water supply part and waste drainage
part.

Inlet deionized water is provided from the outside of the instrument, and is conveyed by
the interior wash pump and the deionized water syringe to other modules. Inlet diluted
wash solution is provided by an external diluted wash solution tank outside the
instrument, and is conveyed by the wash solution syringe to phase 1 of wash, as detailed
below:
 detecting deficient fluid level of dionized water, and alarming.

 detecting deficient fluid level of diluted wash solution, and alarming.
 filtering deionized water and diluted wash solution, and performing filtering before
the inlet deionized water and the inlet diluted wash solution outside the whole unit
are distributed to each unit.
The drainage module allows discharging high-/low-concentration waste separately. The

high-concentration waste is discharged by the waste pump to the external high-
concentration waste tank; the low-concentration waste is discharged by the waste pump
of the low-concentration waste tank outside the instrument (and may be discharged via
sewers directly). The high-concentration waste tank is capable of detecting the fluid level.
The high-concentration waste is produced during cuvette cleaning in phase 1.
Low-concentration waste comes from the following sources:
 Cleaning interior/exterior of sample probe and reagent probes

 Cleaning exterior of sample mixer and reagent mixer
 Auto cuvette cleaning in phase 2-4
 Condensate water of the reagent carousels
 Overflowed fluid of the reaction carousel
The first three are the major sources and account for over 99% of low-concentration
waste.
The fluidic diagram of the module is shown below.

Figure 7.5 Fluidic diagram of water supply/drainage module
Reagent Reaction
NS MIX Carouse Carouse
T602
W21 W31
W01 W11
ZQ15
T521 T511
W02 W22
T502
W03
ZZ03
D02 T101 ZZ02 T401 T501 T601 T701

FL01 W04 ZQ16 ZQ04
FL02
D01 ZZ01 FS03
FS01 FS02
V01 V02 V03（选配） V04
7.3.5 Other
The Hydropneumatic system of BS-240 contains 8 external interfaces, as shown in the
figure below, where,
 3 fluidic outlets: used for discharging high-concentration waste, low-concentration

waste 1, and low-concentration waste 2.
 2 fluidic inlets: used for supplying deionized water and diluted wash solution.
 3 control cable connectors: used for connecting the high-concentration waste level
sensor, deionized water level sensor, and diluted wash solution level sensor.

Figure 7.6 External fluidic interfaces of the BS-240
Interfaces for fluid connection
No. Name 8
1 dionized water
4
2 diluted wash solution
3 high concentration waste
4 low concentration waste 1
5 dionized water sensor
6 diluted wash solution sensor 7 3
7 high concentration waste sensor
8 low-concentration waste 2
6 2
Water Waste
Legend
Wash
Sensor
solution
5 1

7.4 Introduction of Fluidic Actions
7.4 Introduction of Fluidic Actions
7.4.1 Fluidic Initialization

The specific procedure is described below:
1 Power off all the pump and valve and they return to the home position.
2 The waste pump discharges waste.
3 The floater status of the deionized water tank, diluted wash solution tank, and high
concentration waste tank are checked. If related alarm is removed, the system moves
to the next step. If not, the system gives out the alarm and the fluidic initialization
fails.
4 Cleaning Probes/Mixers Exterior is performed.
5 The probe and mixer exterior wash syringe is reset; and phase1 wash syringe is
reset.
NOTE:
The fluidic initialization is one part of the startup , system recovery and system wakeup
procedure.
7.4.2 Priming Wash Station

The specific procedure is described below:
1 Open wash waste pump P02~P04.

2 Let the wash station move down to the cuvette bottom.
3 Prime the wash station cyclically 3 times.
4 After completion of priming, close the wash solenoid valve, reset the wash syringe,
let the wash station move to the home position, and close the waste pump P02~P04.

7.5 Removing and Reinstalling Hydropneumatic Components

This Section describes removing and installation methods of the Hydropneumatic
components, and provides schematic diagrams and pictures of components for service
engineers to refer.
7.5.1 Overview
When an alarm is displayed on the operating software of BS-240, service engineers can
analyze the instrument status and finally locate the failure source, and if necessary,
replace the failed part or component. Generally, service engineers are not recommended
to remove the electric devices, such as pumps, solenoid valves, clog detection device,
syringes, etc. Only when both hardware and software are confirmed normal but the
Hydropneumatic alarm still remains are service engineers suggested to remove the
relevant device and then analyze or replace it.
Prior to removing Hydropneumatic components, make sure that all pumps and solenoid
valves of the Hydropneumatic system have been turned off, and both the analyzer power
switch and main power switch have been placed to the OFF position.
Table 7.2 Necessary tools for removing/installing Hydropneumatic components
Name Quantity
Cross head screwdriver 1
Hexagon screwdriver 1
Flathead screwdriver 1
Strap Several
Diagonal pliers 1
Tube cutter 1

7.5.2 Probe and Mixer Wash Module

Figure 7.7 Assembly drawing of whole unit –Probe and mixer wash module-front view
Sample probe 500μl syringe Mixer
Probe wash well
Mixer wash well

Figure 7.8 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Probe wash module-rear view
Probes exterior
Deionized water inlet T-valve Mixer Exterior Wash valve
wash valve
Deionized Water Syringe
Probe interior wash valve
Probes Interior wash pump
No. FRU No. or Part Part Name Remark

No.
1 801-BA23-00025-00 Syringe 500ul(ZDV) FRU
2 082-002435-00 Two-position two-way valve FRU/probe interior wash valve
3 BA30-21-15311 KNF diaphragm pump assembly FRU/probe interior wash pump
4 115-011901-00 10 ml screw rod driving syringe FRU/deionized water Syringe
assembly (FRU)
5 082-002265-00 Vertically moving 3-way LVMK202-6J - FRU/ deionized water inlet
90kPa~0.2MPa 12VDC valve
6 082-002264-00 Vertically moving 2-way LVMK21-6J - FRU/probe exterior wash valve
90kPa~0.2MPa 12VDC
7 M6G-020049--- Rubber FRU
hose .PTFEID1.5mmXOD2.5mm×100M
8 0040-10-32301 Rubber hose .PTFE,0.040"IDX0.066"OD FRU
9 082-002374-00 Rubber hose .3.2*6.4mm TPU FRU
polyether
10 801-BA80-00009-00 Wash well shell FRU
11 801-BA40-00221-00 Wash well (mould MR61463) FRU

Removing/Reinstalling Wash Syringe Assembly

When to do
Analyze or replace the wash syringe when it has abnormal sound, worse precision,
leaking, or other failures.
Disassembling Steps
1 Remove the 4 M4×8 cross pan head screws used to fix the syringe shield and remove
the shield.
2 Disconnect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.
3 Remove the tube from the barbed connector of the syringe.
4 Remove the four M3×12 hexagon socket head cap screws with spring washer and
remove the syringe.
Installation Procedure
1 Install the 4 M3×12 hexagon socket head cap screws with spring washer and do not
miss the shock pad .
2 Cut off a little from the tube's end and insert the tube to the barbed connector of the
syringe. If a strap has been applied, restore it.
3 Connect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.
4 Use 4 M4×8 cross pan head screws to fix the syringe shield on the right side plate.
5 Power on the analyzer, log on the software with service user account, and then select
Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Engineer -> Clear. If the interior wash
syringe is replaced, select the "Replace Interior Wash Syringe" item. If the cuvette
wash syringe is replaced, select the "Replace Cuvette Wash Syringe" item. Click OK to
zero the use count of the relevant syringe.
Figure 7.9 Details of wash syringe assembly
Right baffle weld (BA49)
Wash Syringe Assembly

115-013114-00
Syringe dust shield
M3×12 hexagon socket cap head

screw, with spring/flat washer

Removing/Installing Solenoid Valves

When to do
When a solenoid valve cannot be turned on or has leaks, it needs to be removed and then
analyzed or replaced.
Disassembling Steps
1 Disconnect the solenoid valve’s power cord connector.

2 Mark the installation direction of the valve and the connection mode of the inlet and
outlet tubes to prevent them from being confused.
3 Remove the tubes and apply strap on their openings to prevent liquid spraying.
4 Loosen the screws on the solenoid valve and then remove the solenoid valve.
1 Check the installation direction according to the marks, connect the inlet and outlet
tubes, and then tighten the tube clamps or straps.
2 Tighten the retaining screws to fix the solenoid valve.
3 Make sure that the power cord is connected to the correct positive and negative
ends.
Verification steps
Refer to Section 8.9 Hydropneumatic Unit.

Figure 7.10 Details of wash solenoid valve assembly
Disassembling/assembling interior wash pump

When to do
The pump does not work, that is, there is no flow or pressure.
The pump flow and pressure is low.
The pump has leaks.
Noise is produced when the pump is working.
Disassembling Steps
1 Disconnect the pump’s power cord connector.

2 Mark the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes and prevent them from being
confused.
3 Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings or use a tank to hold water, so
as to prevent liquid from entering the instrument.
4 Loosen the screws fixing the pump and then remove the pump.
1 Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the marks and then tighten the tube
clamps.

2 Tighten the retaining screws to fix the pump.

3 Make sure that the power cord is connected correctly.
Verification steps
NOTE:
Exercise caution to avoid confusing the inlet tube with the outlet tube.
Make sure that the power cord of the DC pump is connected to the correct positive and
negative ends.
Figure 7.11 Pump assembly structure
Probes Interior wash pump

7.5.3 Cuvette Wash Module

Figure 7.12 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Cuvette wash module –rear view
Wash
Wash Solution solution Phase-2 wash Phase-3 wash
Syringe shift valve solution dispense solution dispense
valve valve
Deionized
Water Syringe
Wash
preheating
tank
P02-P04
waste pump

Figure 7.13 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Cuvette wash module –front view
Wipe block
Cuvette wash
station
Wash probe
assembly
No. Part No. FRU name Remark

1 Rotational diaphragm pump Phase 1-8 Wash Waste Pump
2000-21-06116
assembly
2 Soneloid valve LVMK21-6J Phase 3-6 cuvette wash
082-002273-00
cable solenoid valve
3 BA38-21-88190 WTB-3R-N4E T-valve cable Phase 1-2 cuvette wash
solenoid valve
4 115-011901-00 10 ml screw rod driving Cuvette wash syringe
syringe assembly assembly
5 115-020528-00 Preheating assembly FRU
6 043-000422-00 Filter FRU
7 115-027921-00 Wash probe assembly FRU
8 041-005591-00 Wipe block FRU
9 BA38-30-88154 Wash phase probe assembly FRU
10 BA40-30-61934 Wipe phase probe assembly FRU

Removing/Reinstalling Wash Syringe Assembly
When to do
Analyze or replace the wash syringe when it has abnormal sound, worse precision,
leaking, or other failures.
Disassembling Steps
1 Disconnect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.

2 Remove the tube from the barbed connector of the syringe.
3 Remove the four M3×12 hexagon socket head cap screws with spring washer and
remove the syringe.
1 Install the 4 M3×12 hexagon socket head cap screws with spring washer and do not
miss the shock pad .
2 Cut off a little from the tube's end and insert the tube to the barbed connector of the
syringe. If a strap has been applied, restore it.
3 Connect the syringe motor cable and sensor cable.
4 Power on the analyzer, log on the software with service user account, and then select
Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Engineer -> Clear. If the cuvette wash
syringe is replaced, select the "Replace Cuvette Wash Syringe" item. Click OK to zero
the use count of the relevant syringe.
Verification steps
Removing/Reinstalling Waste Pump

When to do
The pump does not work, that is, there is no flow or pressure.
The pump flow and pressure is low.
The pump has leaks.
Noise is produced when the pump is working.
Disassembling Steps
1 Disconnect the pump’s power cord connector.

2 Mark the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes and prevent them from being
confused.
3 Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings or use a tank to hold water, so
as to prevent liquid from entering the instrument.
4 Loosen the screws fixing the pump and then remove the pump.

1 Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the marks and then tighten the tube
clamps.
2 Tighten the retaining screws to fix the pump.
3 Make sure that the power cord is connected correctly.
Verification steps
NOTE:
Exercise caution to avoid confusing the inlet tube with the outlet tube.
Make sure that the power cord of the DC pump is connected to the correct positive and
negative ends.
Phase 1-3 waste pump
Removing/Reinstalling Cuvette Wash Preheating Assembly

When to do
 The heater is damaged.

 The temperature sensor is damaged.
 The temperature protection switch is damaged.
 The canister has leaks.
 The connectors are leaking.
Disassembling Steps

2 Open the rear panel.

3 Mark the connection modes of the following parts: inlet/outlet tubes, heater,
temperature protection switch and temperature sensor for wash solution, and
inlet/outlet tubes, heater, temperature protection switch and temperature sensor for
deionized water.
4 Disconnect the connectors of the heaters, sensors and protection switches.
5 Loosen the two M4×8 hexagon socket head screws fixing the cuvette wash
preheating assembly.
6 Apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid from flowing out.
7 Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubes.
1 Prepare a new cuvette wash preheating assembly.

2 Connect the connectors according to the marks.
3 Connect the tubes according to the marks.
4 Use 2 M4×8 hexagon socket head screws to fix the preheating assembly.
5 Check if the installation is complete.
6 Restore the instrument.
7 Connect the power supply and perform fluidic prime before testing the system.
Verification steps
NOTE:
Operate carefully to prevent liquid from entering the instrument.
Connect the tubes and connectors correctly.
Do not confuse the heater and sensor channel of wash solution with those of cleaning
fluid.

Figure 7.14 Structure of cuvette wash preheating assembly
Wash solution
outlet
Wash solution
Wash
heater/sensor
solution inlet
Deionized water
Deionized heater/sensor
water inlet
Deionized
water outlet
Removing/Reinstalling Filter
When to do
The filter should be maintained regularly.
Disassembling Steps
1 The filter is located outside and under the inlet assembly.

2 Remove the filter tube and the filter, and then apply straps on the tube opening to
prevent liquid inside the tube from spraying out.
1 Install the filter tube and apply a strap.
Verification steps
Figure 7.15 Assembly drawing of whole unit -- Acetabular filter
Removing/Reinstalling Wash Probe Assembly

When to do

When fluid overflows the cuvettes or the dispensed cleaning fluid is less than the normal
volume, probably a wash probe is clogged and needs to be removed and unclogged.
Disassembling Steps
1 Manually loosen the retaining screws on the wash probe bracket.

2 Remove the wash probe assembly and place it in a container.
3 Turn on the dispense valves and vacuum valves, and then locate the clogged wash
probe.
4 Use a needle to unclog the probe.
1 Align the locating holes on the wash probe assembly with the stop studs on the
bracket, and then slightly tighten the retaining screws.
2 Lower the wash probe assembly, use an alignment fixture or eyes to check the phase
4 wipe blocks corresponding to the cuvette wall, and then slightly adjust the wash
probe assembly to prevent the wash probes from colliding with the cuvettes.
3 After finishing the second step, completely tighten the retaining screws on the wash
probe assembly.
Verification steps
NOTE:
Operate carefully to prevent liquid from dropping into the reaction carousel and
cuvettes.
7.5.4 External Modules
External high-concentration waste tank cap assembly

The external high-concentration waste tank cap assembly contains one FRU.
Table 7.5 High-concentration waste tank cap assembly FRU

1 115-037348-00 Waste tank cap assembly FRU
External diluted wash solution tank cap assembly

The external diluted wash solution tank cap assembly contains one FRU.
Table 7.6 High-concentration waste tank assembly FRU

1 115-037347-00 Wash solution tank cap FRU

assembly
External deionized water tank cap assembly

The external deionized water tank cap assembly contains one FRU.
Table 7.7 High-concentration waste tank assembly FRU

1 115-037347-00 Wash solution tank cap FRU
assembly

8 Alignment

8 Alignment
8.1 Basic Operation
8.1 Basic Operation
8.1.1 Utility - Maintenance

Table 8.1 Utility - Maintenance
No Description
1, 2 Maintenance and Diagnostics: used to maintain and diagnose the
system at user end.
3 Alignment: used to align all mechanical positions, and the
hydropneumatic, pyrology and ISE units.
4 Parameters: used to inquire and configure parameters, and to
export parameters of each unit.
5 SPT: provides basic performance tests for the system, including
photometer test, precision test (dye), precision test (weight),
cuvette residue test, and carryover test.
6 Export Parameters: allows exporting mechanical position
alignment parameters
Figure 8.1 "Maintenance" screen

8 Alignment
8.1 Basic Operation
NOTE:
Before replacing the main control board, you must export the alignment parameters to
a local folder on the Parameter Configuration window. After finishing the replacement,
import the parameters to the software. Otherwise, the system, when started up, will
give an alarm indicating key parameters not configured and cannot be restored. Also
change the parameter of fluidic prime status.
8.1.2 Alignment fixtures

Table 8.2 Alignment fixtures
No Code Name Image/Precision Quantity

1 BA24-J04 BA24 cuvette alignment 2
fixture
2 BA10-J16 Reagent bottle center 3

alignment fixture
3 BA48-J10 Sample position 3

alignment fixture
4 BA60-J07 Pseudo probe 1
5 BA80-J20- Alignment fixture block 1

001
6 BA48-J16 Mixer alignment lever 1
7 BA24-J05 BA24 mixer horizontal 1

position alignment
cuvette

8 Alignment
8.1 Basic Operation
No Code Name Image/Precision Quantity

8 BA40-J76 Mixer wash well 1
alignment fixture
9 BA24-J01 Wash probe position 1

alignment fixture
10 BA48-J12 Sample probe wash well 1

alignment fixture
11 BA24-J03 Reagent carousel bar 1

code reader alignment
fixture
12 / Clearance gauge 0.5mm 1
8.1.3 Mechanical Reset

Alignment methods and procedure:
1 Install the pseudo probe (BA60-J07), and block the collision sensor with folded thick
paper.
2 Access the Alignment window and select Mech Reset to reset the mechanical parts of
the system.

8 Alignment
8.2 Alignment Procedure
8.2 Alignment Procedure

Figure 8.2 Alignment Procedure
Start
Download program
Installation of of upper
Preparation Powering On
Operating Software layer/lower layer
unit
Signal Collecting
Photoelectric unit Photoelectric gain
Position
adjustment adjustment
Adjustment
Bar code label Testing reagent bar

Bar Code Unit Adjusting Bar Code
printing and code scanning
(Optional) Reader Position
affixing stability
Sample/reagent Reaction Carousel

Sample/Reagent Sample/Reagent Sample Carousel
carousel unit Circumferential
Carousel Outer Ring Carousel Middle Inner Ring Radial
parameter Position
Radial Position Ring Radial Position Position
adjustment Adjustment
Adjust Horizontal Adjust Horizontal Adjust Horizontal

Setting Aligning Horizontal
Position from Probe to Position from Probe to Position from Probe to
Parameters of Position from Probe to
Sample/Reagent Carousel Sample/Reagent Carousel Sample/Reagent Carousel
Probe Unit Reaction Carousel
Outer Ring Middle Ring Inner Ring
Aligning Horizontal and Vertical Extreme Position

Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Probe Rotary to Sample Probe Cuvette
Vertical Positions from from Probe to Reagent
SIC Height (Optional) ISE (Optional) Height
Probe to Wash Well Bottle
Setting Adjust Horizontal

Cuvette Wash Station
Parameters of Position from Wash Probe
Height
Cuvette Wash Unit to Reaction Cuvette
Adjusting Horizontal Adjusting Mixing Position Adjusting Horizontal

Setting Mixer Unit
Position from Mixer from Mixer to Reaction Position from Mixer to
Parameter
to Reaction Carousel Carousel Wash Well
Preparations before Checking Floater/

Fluidics Alignment Syringe Check Fluidic Prime
Alignment Valve Status
Setting Reaction Wash Solution Reagent

Setting Pyrology Reaction carousel
Carousel Sensor Temperature refrigeration
Unit Parameter heating detection
Parameter Curve adjustment
Completing parameter
configuration table and test
record table
End

8 Alignment

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Photoelectric unit. The window is shown
below.
8.3.1 Photoelectric collection position adjustment

Alignment index:
The collected signal of 3# cuvette position is between two border lines.
1 The reaction carousel location sensor is located on the right side of the whole unit. To
perform alignment, the right cover needs to be opened.
2 Use an M3 hexagon wrench to loosen 3 screws that fasten the sensor. Put the sensor
in the middle of the adjustable range, slightly tighten a screw, and then select Signal
Collecting Position Adjustment to display the alignment window.

8 Alignment
Reaction carousel
position sensor
3 Make sure the lamp has been turned on for over 1 minute. If not, wait for 1 minute,
and then select "Start" to proceed to the next step.
4 A prompt box appears. Select "Start", and use a pipettor to add 200μl deionized
water into the reaction cuvette indicated on the screen. Select "Next".
5 Observe the waveforms in the upper part of the window and check if the
photoelectric signal meets the alignment requirement. See the figure below. If not,
adjust the photocoupler.

8 Alignment
 To adjust the photocoupler, loosen the 3 M3 hexagon screws that fasten the
photocoupler bracket. Use a wrench to hit the sensor gently to adjust its location, and
the green box graph moves rightward. Adjust the sensor location counterclockwise,
and the green box graph moves leftward. After the adjustment, tighten one screw
slightly. Click "Realign", and the software performs tests and judgment again.
 If the photocoupler is in a proper position, select Done without any adjustment.
6 Tighten the sensor screws.
8.3.2 Photoelectric gain adjustment

Index Setup

8 Alignment
Figure 8.3 Access the "Index Setup" screen:
 The water blank AD value of each channel is set to 48000-54000.

 The optical gain coefficient of all channels is generally set to 40 for a new instrument,
and may be set to 30 for a client-side old instrument.
 The dark current of all channels is 1~200.
Alignment methods and steps:
1 Select Photoelectric Gain Adjustment.

2 Make sure the lamp has been turned on for over 3 minutes, and then select "Done". If
you do not click "Done", you need to wait for 3 minutes.
3 Add 200uL deionized water into cuvettes 1~5 in segment 1 according to step 4 on
the screen.
4 The photoelectric gain is adjusted automatically. When adjustment is complete, select
Done.
5 Select "Continue" to test the dark current and the water blank AD of each channel.
6 Select "Continue" to finish the alignment and exit the procedure.
NOTE:
Ensure that the screws on the reaction carousel position sensor bracket have been
tightened.

8 Alignment
Alignment parameters can be saved only after each procedure is complete. Another
alignment is required if a procedure is terminated. If the parameter is not successfully
configured or out of range, the parameter range will be displayed by the alarm message
and re-perform the alignment.

8 Alignment
8.4 Sample/reagent carousel unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Sample/Rgt Carousel. The window is shown
below.
8.4.1 Reaction Carousel Rotary

Alignment index:
The sample probe (pseudo probe BA60-J07) can pass through the through-hole on the
cuvette alignment fixture (BA24-J04).
Operation methods and steps:
1 Select Reaction Carousel Rotary. Access the alignment screen and operate as
prompted.
2 Select "Continue" to reset all mechanical parts of the whole unit.
3 Place a cuvette alignment fixture (BA24-J04) in cuvettes of the sample position 19#
and dilution position 14# of the reaction carousel body
4 Adjust the sample probe to the position of the reaction carousel.
 Tighten the screw of the arm of the sample probe to such an extent that the arm
cannot swing freely but can rotate freely when you push the arm. Note: If the arm
can rotate automatically, the position is not proper. When you push the arm
manually, do not drive rotation of the motor. If the motor rotates, exit the window
and access the alignment window again.

8 Alignment
 Click the button in the dialog box, rotate the probe to the top of the sample dispense
position of the reaction carousel, and then use a hand to push the probe arm to
swing it, and observe whether the probe can pass through the center hole of the
alignment fixture on two cuvette positions simultaneously. If it cannot, adjust the
radial position of the probe and the circumferential parameters of the probe (the left
and right arrows on the lower right corner of the screen control the circumferential
movement of the carousel) to achieve the alignment purpose. After the radial
position of the probe is confirmed, tighten the radial retaining screw.
BA60-J07
BA24-J04
Circumferential track of reaction carousel
Probe track
Find an intersection at reaction cuvette

center between the probe track and the
circumferential track of reaction carousel
 After completion of the alignment, select "Continue" to proceed to the next step.
5 Click "Continue" to check whether the positions of the dispense position and the
dilution position of the reaction carousel are correct.
6 Select "Continue". The alignment is complete. Select Exit to close the window.
NOTE:
The alignment fixtures will be used in following alignment. Leave them aside.
The left arrow button is equivalent to rotating clockwise and the right arrow button
rotating counterclockwise.
When selecting Large Step, you can set up the concrete steps according to the
reference range.

8 Alignment
Once the probe arm length is determined, it must not be adjusted during alignment of
probes and carousels.
If the probe arm length is changed, the probe and carousel units should be aligned
again.
8.4.2 Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring Radial Position

Alignment index:
The sample probe (fixture: BA60-J07 pseudo probe) can pass through the center hole of
the sample position alignment fixture (BA48-J10) in sample positions 1#, 14#, and 27# of
the outer ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
1 Select "Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Circumferential Position", and then

operate according to the screen prompts.
2 Place a sample position alignment fixture BA48-J10 in sample positions 1#, 14#, and
27# of the outer ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
Select "Continue".
The probe tip can pass

through the central hole
of the alignment tool.
BA48-J10
3 Loosen the arm screw a little so that the probe arm cannot rotate freely but can be
rotated by hands. If the arm rotates freely, the adjusted position will be inaccurate.
Do not move the motor when rotating the probe arm. If the motor moves, exit the
window and access again.

8 Alignment
4 Manually rotate the probe arm to 1# position of the sample/reagent carousel outer
ring, and click the up and down arrow buttons to stop the probe at the visually
nearest position above the fixture. Check if the probe tip is aligned with the middle of
the through-hole. If it is not, manually rotate the arm to the crossing point in
circumferential direction of the sample carousel outer ring, and click the left and
right arrow buttons to adjust the probe's circumferential position on the outer ring,
so that the probe tip can pass through the center hole of the fixture in 1# position.
The 4 arrows are

used to control the
probe.
The 2 arrows are

used to control the
carousel.
5 Adjust the reagent probe in 14# and 27# positions of the sample/reagent carousel
outer ring according to step 3.
8.4.3 Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring Radial Position

Alignment index:
the reagent center alignment fixture (BA10-J16) in reagent positions 1#, 14#, and 27# of
the middle ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
1 Select "Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring Radial Position".

8 Alignment
2 Place a reagent position alignment fixture BA10-J16 in positions #1, #14 and #27 of
the sample/reagent carousel, and then select "Continue".
3 Adjust the positions #1, #14 and #27 of the middle ring of the sample/reagent
carousel according to step 4 of "Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring
Circumferential Position".
8.4.4 Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Radial Position

Alignment index:
the reagent center alignment fixture (BA10-J16) in reagent positions 41#, 54#, and 67#
of the inner ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
1 Select "Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring Radial Position".

2 Place a sample position alignment fixture BA10-J16 in positions 41#, 54#, and 67#
of the sample carousel, and then select "Continue".
3 Adjust the positions 41#, 54#, and 67# of the inner ring of the sample/reagent
carousel according to step 4 of "Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring
Circumferential Position".
NOTE:
When the alignment is complete, there is no need to take out the alignment fixture.

8 Alignment
8.5 Probe unit
8.5 Probe unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Sample Probe Unit. The window is shown
below.
8.5.1 Probe to Horizontal Position on Reaction Carousel

Alignment index:
The sample probe (pseudo probe BA60-J07) can pass through the through-hole on the
cuvette alignment fixture (BA24-J04).
1 Select Sample Probe Rotary to Cuvette.

2 Place the cuvette alignment fixture (BA24-J04) in positions 19# and 14# of the
reaction carousel, and then select "Continue".
3 Select the down arrow button to lower the sample probe to the top of the alignment
fixture in position 19# so that it can align with the center hole.
4 Adjust the circumferential position of the probe arm and ensure that the sample
probe can enter the center hole on the fixture. Press the probe arm and tighten the
screws on it. If error exists, click the left and right arrow buttons to adjust the probe
till it meets the requirement.

8 Alignment
8.5 Probe unit
BA24-J04
5 Select "Continue" and verify the alignment with the up and down arrow buttons. If
the index is not satisfied, return to the previous step and try again.
6 Click "Continue". Move the sample probe to the top of the position 14#. Click the up
and down arrows to drop the sample probe to the top of the fixture. Check whether
the probe tip can enter the center hole of the fixture. If it cannot, click the left and
right arrows to adjust parameters until index requirements are met.
7 Select "Continue" and verify the alignment with the up and down arrow buttons. If
the index is not satisfied, return to the previous step and try again.
8 Select "Continue" to save parameters and exit the window.
8.5.2 Aligning Horizontal and Vertical Positions from Probe to Wash Well
Alignment index:
 Horizontal position: The sample probe tip can enter the center hole on the wash well
alignment fixture (BA48-J12). The gap between the wash well and the cover is even.
 Vertical position: When reaching the bottom of the center hole on the wash well
alignment fixture (BA48-J12), the sample probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means
that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor
plate and the arm base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.
1 Select "Sample Probe Rotary to Wash Well and Home".

2 According to step 2 on the screen, place a wash well alignment fixture (BA48-J12) in
the sample probe wash well, and then select "Continue".
3 Select the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to move the sample probe till it
lowers into the center on the alignment fixture. If the reagent probe is greatly
deviating from the alignment fixture, use a big cross head screwdriver to loosen the
screws that fasten the wash well or the wash well bracket, adjust the wash well till
the sample probe can enter to the center hole on the alignment fixture, and then
tighten the screws that fasten the wash well (and the wash well bracket).

8 Alignment
8.5 Probe unit
Use the clearance gauge to

BA48-J12 measure the gap here and keep
it away from the slit on the
photocoupler side. The
soldering lug is deformable and
may affect the measurement.
Criteria: The clearance gauge
can pass with 0.15mm and
cannot pass with 0.2mm.
4 Confirm the alignment result. If the requirements are not met, return to the previous
step.
5 Adjust the sample probe's vertical position above the wash well by using the up and
down arrow buttons. Check that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm and
cannot pass with 0.20mm.
6 Check the vertical position. If the requirements are not met, return to step 5.
7 Remove the alignment fixture according to screen prompts.
8.5.3 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring

Alignment index:
The sample probe tip can enter the center hole of the alignment fixture (BA48-J10) in
positions 1#, 14#, and 27# of the outer ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
1 Select Sample Probe Rotary to Sample/Reagent Carousel Outer Ring.

2 Place a sample position alignment fixture (BA48-J10) in positions 1#, 14#, and 27#
of the outer ring of the sample/reagent carousel, and then Select "Continue".
3 Select the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to move the sample probe so that it
can enter into the center hole on the alignment fixture.
8.5.4 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring

Alignment index:
positions 1#, 14#, and 27# of the middle ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
1 Select "Sample Probe Rotary to Sample/Reagent Carousel Middle Ring".

8 Alignment
8.5 Probe unit
2 Place a reagent position alignment fixture (BA10-J16) in positions 1#, 14#, and 27#
of the middle ring of the sample/reagent carousel, and then Select "Continue".
8.5.5 Probe to Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring

Alignment index:
positions 41#, 54#, and 67# of the inner ring of the sample/reagent carousel.
1 Select "Sample Probe Rotary to Sample/Reagent Carousel Inner Ring".

2 Place a reagent position alignment fixture (BA10-J16) in positions 41#, 54#, and
67# of the inner ring of the sample/reagent carousel, and then Select "Continue".
8.5.6 Sample Probe Cuvette Height

Alignment index:
When reaching the cuvette bottom, the sample probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which means
that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the sensor plate
and the arm base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.
1 Select "Adjust Vertical Extreme Position from Probe to Reaction Carousel".

2 Check that cuvettes are loaded in positions 1#, 14#, and 27# of the reaction carousel.
3 Adjust the sample probe over the 3 cuvette positions, and ensure that the lifting
height meets the requirement.
8.5.7 Vertical Extreme Position from Probe to Reagent Bottle

Alignment index:
When reaching the reagent bottle bottom, the sample probe is lifted for 0.15mm, which
means that the clearance gauge can pass with 0.15mm through the gap between the
sensor plate and the arm base and it cannot pass with 0.20mm.

8 Alignment
8.5 Probe unit
1 Select "Adjust Vertical Extreme Position from Probe to Reagent Bottle".

2 Check that reagent bottles are loaded in positions 1#, 14#, and 27# of the middle ring
of the sample/reagent carousel.
3 Adjust the sample probe over the 3 reagent positions, and ensure that the lifting
height meets the requirement.
8.5.8 Sample Probe Rotary to ISE (Optional)

Alignment index:
The sample probe has its tip above the ISE sample injection port but deviates slightly from
the center hole. The probe tip should not contact with the inwall of the sample inject port.
1 Check if the ISE module has been installed.

2 Select "S Probe Rotary to ISE".
3 According to step 3, select the down arrow button to lower the sample probe to
above the ISE sample injection port. Select the left/right arrow buttons to adjust the
sample probe radially till it is 1mm away from the center of the sample injection port
or deviating slightly from the center hole. The probe tip should not contact with the
inwall of sample inject port.
4 If the sample probe fails by adjusting parameters, loose the screws fixing the ISE
module on the chassis, and then move it till requests are met.
5 If the problem still remains, use a cross head screwdriver to loosen the screws on the
ISE module and move it till requests are met.
6 The operation in step 3 is verified in step 4. If requirements are not met, return to
step 3.
8.5.9 Sample Probe Rotary to SIC Height (Optional)

Alignment index:
The sample probe has its tip level with the third transition line in the sample injection cup.
1 Check if the S Probe Rotary to ISE alignment has been completed.

2 Select "S Probe Rotary to SIC Height".

8 Alignment
8.5 Probe unit
3 According to step 3 on the screen, select the up/down arrow buttons to make the
probe tip level with the third transition line inside the sample injection cup. (You can
see three transition lines, and the probe tip shall be level with the one at the bottom,
as shown in the figure below.)
step 3.
Probe tip level

with this line
NOTE:
Alignment of each position is verified the next step.
alignment is required if a procedure is terminated.
If the parameter is not successfully configured or out of range, the parameter range
will be displayed by the alarm message and re-perform the alignment.

8 Alignment
8.6 Mixer Unit
8.6 Mixer Unit

Select "Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Mixer Unit". The window is shown below.
8.6.1 Adjusting Horizontal Position from Mixer to Reaction Carousel

Alignment index:
The mixer (using BA48-J16 mixer alignment lever as a fixture) can enter the through hole
of the BA24-J05 mixing horizontal position alignment cuvette in position 9# of the
reaction carousel.
1 Install the mixer fixture BA48-J16, and then select "Adjusting Horizontal Position
from Mixer to Reaction Carousel".

8 Alignment
8.6 Mixer Unit
BA48-J16 ： Alignment
lever (inserted to the end)
2 Place 1 mixer-reaction cuvette horizontality alignment fixture (BA24-J05) in position

9# of the reaction carousel.
3 Adjust the mixer position according to step 3.
 Click the up and down arrow to move the mixer to the top of the fixture.
 When the mixer can be aligned with the center position of the fixture on the
circumferential track, use an M3 hexagon wrench to pre-tighten the arm screw (to
such an extent that the arm cannot swing freely but can rotate freely when you push
the arm manually).
 Rotate the arm to a lower position that has enough space. Pre-tighten the radial
screw of the mixer, and then rotate back to the top of the reaction carousel fixture.
Determine the radial position of the mixer, and then rotate the arm to a position that
has enough space, and tighten the radial screw.
The radial retaining

screw of the mixer is on
the lower part, and the
retaining screw space is
deficient, so that the arm
needs to be moved to
BA48-J16
sufficient space to
facilitate operation
BA24-J05
 Return to the top of the reaction carousel fixture and fasten the circumferential
screw of the arm.
4 If the lever is not correct horizontally, select the left/right arrow buttons in step 4 to
adjust so that it can align with the alignment fixture.
step 4.
6 Select "Continue", remove the fixture and store it properly.

8 Alignment
8.6 Mixer Unit
8.6.2 Adjusting Vertical Position from Mixer to Reaction Carousel

Alignment index:
The lever drops to the center of the cuvette, so that the go gauge of the block of the
alignment fixture (BA80-J20-001) can pass through the gap between them and the no-go
gauge cannot.
1 Select "Adjust Vertical Position from Mixer to Reaction Carousel". Make sure that the
fixture of the mixing position is holding a cuvette instead of the alignment fixture.
2 Select "Continue". After the system resets mechanically, the mixer moves into the
cuvette.
3 Select the up/down arrow buttons, and insert the alignment fixture BA80-J20-001
between the mixer's straight-knurled column and cuvette edge. Gently push the
alignment fixture to observe if the Go Gauge can easily pass while the No-go Gauge
cannot.
The go gauge of mixer alignment

tool (thin) can be passed through
and no-go gauge (thick) cannot be
passed through
step 2.
8.6.3 Adjusting Horizontal Position from Mixer to Wash Well

Alignment index:
The mixer (using BA48-J16 mixing alignment lever as a fixture) can enter the through
hole on the alignment fixture (BA40-J76) of the position from the mixer to the wash well,
and the gap between the mixer/wash well and the cover is even.
1 Select "Adjust Horizontal Position from Mixer to Wash Well".

8 Alignment
8.6 Mixer Unit
2 Click "Continue". Place a wash well alignment fixture BA40-J76 in the mixing wash
position.
3 Click the up and down arrow to move the mixer fixture to the top of the wash well
alignment fixture. Click the left and right arrows so that the circumferential position
of the mixer fixture can be aligned with the center hole of the wash well alignment
fixture. If the radial position cannot be aligned, loosen the wash well retaining screw,
and adjust the position of the wash well to meet alignment requirements.
BA40-J76
step 2.
5 Remove the fixture, Select "Continue" to save parameters and exit the window, and
then replace the mixer.

8 Alignment
8.7 Setting Parameters of Cuvette Wash Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Cuvette Wash Unit. The window is shown
below.
8.7.1 Setting Parameters of Best Alignment Position

1 Search the H-046-008697-00 BS-240 Series Parameter Configuration Table for the
best alignment cuvette segment number. Input the best cuvette segment number of
the cuvette wash unit, and the maximum deviation cuvette segment in positive and
negative directions, and then click "Configure". Select "Search" and check whether
the configuration result is correct.

8 Alignment
8.7.2 Adjust Horizontal Position from Wash Probe to Reaction Cuvette

Alignment index:
The wash probe can pass through the hole of the wash probe alignment fixture (BA24-
J01), and move smooth.
1 Select "Adjust Horizontal Position from Wash Probe to Reaction Cuvette".

2 Remove the reaction cuvette segment in the best cuvette segment position, place a
fixture BA24-J01 in the position, and Select "Continue".
3 According to Step 3 on the screen, use an M4 hexagon wrench to loosen the two
screws on the wash probe conversion board, adjust the wash probes till the wipe
blocks can move vertically in the center hole of the alignment fixture. When requests
are met, tighten the two screws gradually. Exercise caution to prevent deforming the
probes.

8 Alignment
BA24-J10
4 Remove the fixture, change back the reaction cuvette segment, click the up and down
arrows, and control the wash probe to move vertically in the reaction cuvette. The
movement should be smooth without interfering with the cuvette wall. If the
requirements are not met, return to step 3 and adjust again.
5 In Step 5, the reaction carousel rotates to the forward maximum deviating cuvette
segment. Click the up and down arrows to move the wash station so that the wipe
blocks and wash probes are in the center of the cuvettes and can move smoothly.
6 In Step 6, the reaction carousel rotates to the backward maximum deviating cuvette
segment. Click the up and down arrows to move the wash station so that the wipe
blocks and wash probes are in the center of the cuvettes and can move smoothly.
8.7.3 Cuvette Wash Station Height

Alignment index: When the wash station lowers to the vertical washing position, the
wash probes bounce by 0.7 to 0.8mm, which means that the clearance gauge can pass
with 0.7mm through the gap between the anti-collision blocks and the wash station
bracket and it cannot pass with 0.8mm.
1 Select "Adjust Vertical Position from Wash Probe to Reaction Cuvette".

2 Check if the wipe blocks can insert into the center of each cuvette. Select "Continue".

8 Alignment
3 When the wash probes move vertically to the bottom of the cuvettes, make the
phase-4 probe contact the cuvette bottom, and select Small Step or Large Step. Adjust
the probes with the up/down arrow buttons while measuring the lifting height with
0.7mm and 0.8mm clearance gauges. Make sure the gap between the anti-collision
blocks and the wash station bracket is enough for passing through the 0.7mm
clearance gauge but not enough for passing through the 0.8mm clearance gauge.
4 Verify Step 3. If requests are not met, return to Step 3, and select the up/down arrow
buttons to adjust the mixer till requests are met.

8 Alignment
8.8 Bar Code Unit (Optional)
8.8.1 Bar Code Sticking Requirements

1 The bar code label should be clear, and not vague, dirty or scratched.
2 The sample bar code label should be stuck upright and plane and 9mm away from the
tube bottom.
Area
Sample for
affixing
tube bar
code
9mm
3 The reagent bar code label should be stuck in the front side below the bottle opening,
and in the middle of the vertical and horizontal directions.
Do not stick to the

corner

8 Alignment
Do not stick to the corner
8.8.2 Bar code Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Bar code. The window is shown below.
8.8.3 Adjusting Bar Code Reader Position

Alignment index:

8 Alignment
 The light beam transmitted from the reagent bar code reader can pass through the
slit in the sample position on the bar code reader fixture (BA24-J03) and the slit in
the reagent position.
 The bar code in outer ring positions 1~5# and middle ring positions 1~5# of the
sample/reagent carousel can be identified correctly and completely and displayed on
the screen.
1 Select "Adjust Bar Code Reader".

2 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the tube holder base in the outer positions 26#
and 27#, place the bar code alignment fixture BA24-J03 (the notch surface of the
fixture faces outside), and Select "Continue".
Remove the sample

rack, and insert the
lower positioning pin Reagent bar code
of BA24-J03 into the scan gap
two holes
Sample bar code

scan gap
3 Loosen 4 screws that fasten the bar code reader and the bracket. Adjust the angle of
the light beam until the bar code reader light can pass through the slit in the sample
position of the fixture. If a small circumferential deviation exists, click the left and
right arrows on the screen, and adjust the sample/reagent carousel parameters to
meet requirements.
4 Check again if the light goes through the slot on the fixture. If not, return to previous
step to make adjustment.
5 Remove the alignment fixture, load bar-coded sample tubes in positions 1#-5# of
outer ring and 1#-5# of middle ring, and then start scanning.
6 If all bar code cannot be read, check if the light direction meets the requirement and
the bar code reader works normally.

8 Alignment
Place white paper in front of the fixture, and

the alignment succeeds when the scan light
penetrates the gap on the fixture and falls on
the paper to form a complete straight line
Adjust the screw here (with

two more screws below),
and adjust the location of
the bar code reader
8.8.4 Bar Code Stability Test

Alignment index:
 When the sample/reagent carousel rotates for several circles, the bar code identified
in the same position should be the same.
 The bar code in outer ring positions 1~40# and middle ring positions 1~40# of the
sample/reagent carousel can be identified correctly and completely and displayed on
the screen. Randomly select 3 bar codes on the outer ring and the middle ring
separately, and the software display is consistent with the affixed bar code.
1 Place bar-coded tubes and reagent bottles in sample positions #1- 40# on the outer
ring of the sample carousel, and in reagent positions #1- 40# on the middle ring of
the reagent carousel.
2 Select Reagent Bar Code Stability Test, set the scan circle as 10, and select "Start".
3 After scanning, check if the identified bar code meets the requirement. If different
bar code is read in the same position, the position will be indicated in red.
4 If the stability test fails, find the reasons and take actions according to the following
probabilities:
 Check if the failed bar code meets the printing standard, the bar code label is not
tilting, dirty or damaged and has been applied in correct position.
 Check if the glass scanning window is clean without contamination.
 The scanning window is not blocked by the sponge cushion.
 If none of the above happens, replace the bar code reader, adjust it properly and do
the test again.
 Generally, the three methods above are enough to troubleshoot the problem.
NOTE:
Check that the sponge cushion seals the bar code reader completely without blocking
the scanning light. Otherwise, adjust the bar code reader again.

8 Alignment
After alignment, check if the screws on the bar code reader and conversion board have
been tightened.

8 Alignment
8.9 Hydropneumatic Unit

Select Utility—>Maintenance—>Alignment—>Hydro Unit. The window is shown below.
8.9.1 Preparations before Alignment

1 Check if all tubes have been connected correctly.
2 Check if the transit tubes on the fourth phase wash probe assembly have been
connected properly. Visually check that the fourth phase aspirate tubes are inserted
with the same depth and not bent, and all tubes are smooth without crossover or
protrusion.
3 Check if the solenoid valves have connected to the correct cables.
4 Enough diluted wash solution exists in the diluted wash solution bottle. The dilution
factor of the wash solution is configured according to the cuvette type.
Cuvette type Wash Solution Dilution Factor 1
Plastic Cuvette 8~12 (water):1 (concentrated wash solution)
5 Fill the water tank with water.

6 Connect the water supply tubing to the instrument, and connect the high-/low-
concentration waste tanks.
7 Check if the inlet filter assembly has been installed.
8 Remove the pseudo probes from the sample probe arm, and install the real probes
instead.

8 Alignment
Installation requirements: (1) Gap between the probe plate and the arm surface is not
allowed; otherwise, check the retaining bolt and tube, because the tube's elasticity will
also affect the probe's bouncing; (2) a washer has been applied on the retaining bolt, and
the nut has been tightened; (3) after fixing the probe with bolt and spring, manually lift
the probe and release it, and check that the probe can bounce back freely through the
spring; (4) Adjust the level sense board and the relative positions of the probe plate and
photocoupler so that the probe plate is in the middle of the photocoupler.
8.9.2 Checking Floater and Valve Status
Manually switch the floater status one by one according to the table below, and then select
Query to refresh the floater status. Check if the actual fluid level of each container is the
same as the status displayed on the screen.
Tank Name Floater Status Screen Display

Water tank, diluted wash Floater triggered (high level) Not empty
solution tank
Water tank, diluted wash Floater not triggered (low Empty
solution tank level)
High-concentration waste tank Floater triggered (high level) Full
Floater not triggered (low
High-concentration waste tank Not Full
level)
8.9.3 Syringe Check

1 Select Syringe Check.

8 Alignment
2 Click "deionized water syringe" and "wash solution syringe". If no alarm appears, the
syringes are OK.
8.9.4 Fluidic Prime

1 Select "Fluidic Prime".
2 According to instruments on the window, make sure that the inlet and outlet tubing
has been connected. Remove the wash probe, and place it in an empty container.
3 Enter step 3, click "Continue", and click "Start" to prime the wash probe. When
phase 1-3 wash probes spray water continuously, click "Stop" to stop priming. Click
"OK" to enter the next step. If the priming is not finished in the specified number of
times, set a new number of times, and perform priming again.
4 Reinstall the wash station. According to the prompt on the window, execute the wash
instruction twice, and confirm that no overflow occurs.
5 Click "Continue". According to the prompt on the software, perform mixer exterior
washing and priming. When the mixer wash well can spray water continuously, click
"Stop" to stop priming. Select "OK" to move to the next step.

8 Alignment
6 Click "Continue". According to the prompt on the software, perform probe interior
and exterior washing and priming. When the probe interior and exterior are
washed and water is sprayed continuously, click "Stop" to stop priming. Select "OK"
to move to the next step.
Note: When the software is run, remove the sample syringe of the probe, push and pull
the syringe plunger repeatedly until air bubbles are removed completely from
syringes and T pieces. After all air is discharged, click "Stop". Reinstall the syringe in
such a way that the syringe scale 7.5 is aligned with the V notch. Click "OK" in the
dialog box, and enter the next step.
7 Prime the phases 3-6 wash probes. Select "Continue" to pop up a countdown dialog
box. The instrument primes the phase 3-6 wash probes. Check the dispense probes
till those of phase 3-6 spray clear water continuously without bubbles. After
completion of the priming, observe if the phase 3-6 wash probes are stopped in
order. If yes, select OK; otherwise, select OK and then select Stop at the lower-right
corner. Troubleshoot the error and prime the probes again.
8 Select "Continue" to reset the mechanical parts for 3 times. Check that the
mechanical parts are moving normally.
9 Select "Continue".
10 Select Exit to finish the alignment procedure. Select Maintenance -> Parameters ->
Wash Station to check if the value of "Fluidic Prime Complete" is 1. If yes, the prime is
successful.

8 Alignment
8.10 Pyrology Unit
8.10 Pyrology Unit

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit. The window is shown below.
8.10.1 Sensor Configuration window

Alignment index: Configure the parameters correctly according to the rated values of the
reaction carousel sensors, and configure the △AD value of temperature sensors.

1 Select Sensor Configuration.
2 According to the sequence number on the temperature sensor, contact the
headquarters to find the resistance of rated temperature points (0, 37 and 100),
select sensor 1 and input the resistance for each temperature point, and then select
Calculate.
3 When a dialog box pops up indicating qualified sensor, select Configure to configure
the parameters to the relevant sensor.
4 Observe the △AD value of PCB, and input it in the edit boxes of the window for
sensor 1. Select Configure, and then select Search to verify them.
5 When configuration is complete, select Exit.

8 Alignment
8.10 Pyrology Unit
8.10.2 Observe Temperature Curve

Alignment index:
The reaction carousel heating temperature is 36.7~37.3°C, and the reagent preheating
temperature is 43~47°C.
1 Select Reaction Carousel Temperature Curve.

2 Select "Turn on heater".
3 Select "Sensor Temp Curve 1"(namely, reaction carousel heating temperature curve).
In the temperature curve query area, select "Start". After the curve is steady (when
the temperature rises to about 37°C), observe the reaction carousel temperature
curve for about 1 minute (which may be counted according to the time displayed on
the computer). Make sure that the temperature curve of the sensor is straight and
stable and fluctuate within 36.7~37.3°C.
4 Similarly, check whether the reagent preheating curve is in the specified range
("sensor temperature curve 2" is the reagent preheating curve).
5 Select "Stop". Select "Exit" to close the window.

8 Alignment
8.10 Pyrology Unit
8.10.3 Wash Solution Temperature Control

Alignment index:
The temperature of cleaning fluid and wash solution is within 39°C-49°C.
1 Select Wash Station on the Parameter Configuration window, and check that the
value of "Fluidic Prime Complete" is 1. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment ->
Pyrology Unit -> Wash Solution Temp Curve.
2 Select Deionized Water Heater and Wash Solution Heater, and then select "Turn On".
3 Select "Start". Observe the temperature curves of deionized water and wash solution,
and check if they are straight and stable (for about 2 minutes, counted by the
computer time) with average value within 39°C-49°C.
4 Select "Stop". Select "Exit" to close the window.

8 Alignment
8.10 Pyrology Unit
8.10.4 Reagent Refrigeration Alignment

Methods and procedure:
1 Keep refrigerating the reagent compartment for 30 minutes, and touch the reagent
compartment with a hand to check the refrigeration effect.

9 Proactive Maintenance

9.1 Overview
9.1 Overview
Proactive maintenance is a preventive measure taken by service personnel of Mindray or
authorized by Mindray with the aim of eliminating hidden troubles to ensure system
reliability and achieve best performance during operation. The proactive maintenance
cycle for the chemistry analyzer is one year and for ISE module, half a year. The
maintenance includes changing, cleaning or checking the parts as shown in the table
below.
Table 9.1 Maintenance items to be performed by service personnel
Category Procedure When to do

Replacement items Replace Water Inlet Filter More than 1 year
Replace Diluted Wash Solution Filter More than 1 year
Replace Syringe Over 300,000 times
Replace Calibrator Tube(ISE configured) More than 1 year
Replace Pump Tube(ISE configured) More than half year
Replace Probe Washer More than 1 year
Cleaning items Clean dust screens When needed
Clean the dust of the heatsink fan When needed
Clean Wash Wells When needed
Clean Cuvette Wash Station and Tubes When needed
Clean ISE Injection Port (ISE Configured) When needed
Clean deionized water Tank When needed
Clean Diluted Wash Solution Tank When needed
Clean Sample/Reagent Compartment When needed
Clean Analyzer Panels When needed
Special Wash When needed
Clean Probe Exterior When needed
Clean Mixers When needed
Check Item Pump Calibration (ISE Configured) When needed
Air Bubble Detector Calibration(ISE When needed
configured)
Cuvette Check When needed
Photometer Check When needed
Check Waste Pump When needed
Check deionized water Syringe When needed
Check Wash Solution Syringe When needed

9.2 Maintenance Tools
9.2 Maintenance Tools

Table 9.2 Maintenance Tools
Too Name Applicable Maintenance

Philips-head screwdriver φ3.3×100 Removing the system enclosure and the
cooling fans
Philips-head screwdriver φ4.7×100 Installing and removing the probes and lamp
Slot-head screwdriver φ4.7×100 Removing probe and pipe hoop
Round-head cleaning tool, Unclogging the probes
0.25±0.01mm×125mm round tip
Hair brush Cleaning filter core and dust screens
Gauze Wipe probe/mixer exterior and
sample/reagent compartment
Cotton swabs Clean Wash Wells
Suction cleaner Cleaning fans and dust screens
Tweezers Removing/Installing probes and syringe
washers
Beaker Maintaining wash station
Pipette Clean ISE sample injection port
Ethanol Cleaning photometer, probes, mixers and
wash station
NaClO (0.5% sodium hypochlorite solution) Clean wash wells

9.3 Maintenance Procedure
9.3.1 Execution order of maintenance items

Among the proactive maintenance items of BS-240, some of them are performed with
the main power switched off, while the other are performed through the maintenance
window on the operating software, where maintenance logs are recorded. To improve the
efficiency and shorten the field maintenance time, you are recommended to follow the
procedure below:
Table 9.3 Execution order of maintenance items
No Procedure Maintenance Tools Operations

1 Clean Analyzer Panels Ethanol and gauze Wipe
2 Clean dust screens Hair brush, suction Remove dust
cleaner
3 Clean the dust of the heatsink fan Hair brush, suction Remove dust
cleaner
4 Replace Water Inlet Filter Filter Replace
5 Replace Diluted Wash Solution Filter Filter Replace
6 Clean deionized water Tank / Wash
7 Clean Diluted Wash Solution Tank / Wash
8 Replace Syringe Syringe Replace
9 Replace Probe Washer Washer Replace
10 Replace Pump Tube(ISE configured) Pump Tube Replace
11 Replace Calibrator Tube(ISE configured) Calibrator Tube Replace
12 Clean Probe Exterior Ethanol and gauze Wipe
13 Clean Mixers Ethanol and gauze Wipe
14 Clean Wash Wells NaClO solution and Wipe
cotton swabs
15 Clean Cuvette Wash Station Ethanol and cotton Wipe
swab
16 Clean Sample/Reagent Compartment Ethanol, gauze,cotton Disassemble
swab and wipe
17 Clean ISE Injection Port (ISE Configured) Ethanol and cotton Wipe
swab
18 Pump Calibration (ISE Configured) / Execute
19 Air Bubble Detector Calibration(ISE / Execute
configured)
20 Special Wash Concentrated wash Execute
solution
21 Cuvette Check / Execute
22 Photometer Check / Execute

23 Check Waste Pump / Execute

24 Check deionized water Syringe / Execute
25 Check Wash Solution Syringe / Execute
9.3.2 Steps
Clean Analyzer Panels

1 Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer.
2 Use clean gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the analyzer panels and carousel
covers.
3 Use wash solution to clean the monitor screen and keyboard.
4 Restore the protective shield.
5 After maintenance, open the logs and record related information.

Cleaning dust screens

1 Switch off the analyzer power.
2 Remove the left cover and the rear panel of the analyzer.
3 Remove the dust screen. For the Disassembling Steps, refer to 5.2.4 Removing
left/right dust screen.
4 Tidy and clean the dust screens.
5 Dry the dust screens in air.
6 Restore the dust screen.
7 Reinstall the left cover and the rear panel of the analyzer.
Cleaning the dust of the heatsink fan

1 Refer to Section 5.1.8 in Chapter 5 for cleaning dust of the fans.
Replacing Water Inlet Filter

1 Check the maintenance log and when the age of the inlet filter is more than 1 year,
change it.
2 Refer to Section 7.5.3 in Chapter 7 Cuvette wash module for
disassembling/assembling the filter.
Replacing Diluted Wash Solution Filter

1 Check the maintenance log and when the age of the diluted wash filter is more than
1 year, change it.

2 Refer to Section 7.5.3 in Chapter 7 Cuvette wash module for

disassembling/assembling the filter.
Cleaning deionized water Tank

1 Refer to Section 7.5.4 in Chapter 7.
Cleaning Diluted Wash Solution Tank

1 Refer to Section 7.5.4 in Chapter 7.
Replacing Syringe
1 Check the using count of the syringe on the status screen. When the sample syringe
has been used for 100,000times, change it.
2 Prepare a new syringe or its plunger assembly and washer, put the plunger head in
the deionized water beaker to remove air from the syringe, and then moisten the
washer in the deionized water.
4 Loosen the front cover retaining screw of the syringe.
5 Loosen counterclockwise the four retaining screws on top of the syringe, and then
remove the screws and the fixing blocks.
6 Loosen counterclockwise the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe and then
remove it.
7 Hold the T piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand.
Loosen the syringe counterclockwise and then remove the washer.
8 Loosen the plunger guide cap counterclockwise, hold the plunger head and pull it
slightly to remove the plunger assembly from the syringe.
9 Insert the plunger head of the new plunger assembly into the bottom of the syringe,
and then tighten the retaining screw to fix the plunger head. Tighten the plunger nut
clockwise.
10 Soak the new syringe connector in the deionized water beak, gently pull the plunger
head to aspirate half syringe of deionized water, and then push the plunger head to
remove the air.
11 If no washer is found in the T piece, put the new washer in the T piece. Hold the T
piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand, and then screw
the T piece clockwise.
12 Install the syringe on the bracket.

13 Install the fixing blocks and four retaining screws while having the retaining screws
not tightened.
14 Align the plunger head to the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe, and then
tighten clockwise the retaining screw.
15 Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe height. For the sample syringe,
make the syringe head exceed the upper fixing block by 7.5 scales.
16 Tighten the four retaining screws on the fixing blocks.
17 After finishing replacement, switch on the analyzer power.
18 Perform the "Home maintenance" procedure. Check the new syringe for leak and
bubbles. If leak occurs, check the syringe and the connector.
19 Fasten the front cover of the syringe
20 The procedure is completed. Write the maintenance log and input the maintenance
information and clear the using count of the syringe.
Replacing Probe Washer

1 Check the maintenance log. When the sample probe washer has been used for 1 year
and change it.
2 Remove the probe and take out the probe washer.
3 Install a new washer and reinstall the sample probe.
4 Run the operating software, and select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance-
Biochemistry Maintenance and then select Probe interior clean and prime.
Replacing Pump Tube (ISE configured)

1 Check the maintenance log. When Pump Tube has been used for half year, change it.
2 Refer to Section 5.10.4 in Chapter 5 for replacing Pump Tube.
Replacing Calibrator Tube (ISE configured)

1 View the maintenance log. When the Calibrator Tube has been used for more than 1
year, change it.
2 Refer to Section 5.10.5 in Chapter 5 for Replace Calibrator Tube.
Cleaning Probe Exterior

2 Lift gently the probe to the utmost height and move it to the position convenient for
maintenance.

3 Use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the probe exterior. Clean the probe tip
until it becomes clear without stain. Use gauze moistened with deionized water to
clear the ethanol on the probe. Do not pull the probe vertically to prevent probe
damage.
4 After the procedure, Restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Power on
the analyzing unit and select "Home".
Cleaning Mixers
2 Lift gently the mixer to the utmost height and move it to the position convenient for
maintenance.
3 Use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the mixer exterior. Clean it until it
becomes clear without stain. Use gauze moistened with deionized water to clear the
ethanol on the mixer. Do not pull the mixer vertically to prevent probe damage.
4 After the procedure, Restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Power on
the analyzing unit and select Home.
Cleaning Wash Wells

2 Move the probe and mixer away from the wash well for the convenience of
maintenance.
3 Use clean cotton swabs moistened with NaClO solution to clean the wash wells.
4 After finishing replacement, switch on the analyzer power.
5 Execute "Home" command or Check Probes/Mixers/Wash Wells maintenance
command. Check if the wash wells have a normal water flow.
Cleaning Cuvette Wash Station

1 The analyzing unit should be powered off, or in failure mode or in standby or
incubation status.
2 Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer. Remove the wash station, and use
gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the nozzles and wipe blocks.
3 Use gauze moistened with deionized water to clear the ethanol on the wash probes.
4 Reinstall the wash station and close the upper shielding cover of the analyzer.
5 Execute the "Prime Wash Station" instruction on the "Maintenance" window.

Cleaning Sample/Reagent Compartment

1 The analyzing unit should be powered off, or in failure mode or in standby or
incubation status.
2 Remove the carousel cover and carousel, and then store them properly.
3 Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the interior of the
compartment . If necessary, you can use gauze moistened with neutral wash solution.
4 Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the carousel body
and bar code scanning window, and then use cotton swabs dipped with ethanol to
clean the sample or reagent positions.
5 Reinstall the carousel into the compartment and restore the carousel cover.
Cleaning ISE Injection Port (ISE Configured)

1 Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
2 Enter ISE maintenance screen and select "Clean ISE injection port".
4 Open the cover of the ISE module on the analyzer’s front panel.
5 Use clean cotton swab soaked with ethanol to wipe the sample injection port
(interior of the sample injection cup of the ISE module ) until it is clean; then use a
clean cotton swab soaked with deionized water to wipe the interior and periphery of
the sample injection port .
6 Enter the ISE Maintenance window and execute "purge A" and "purge B" each for
three times.
7 Restore the cover of the ISE module on the analyzer’s front panel. Restore the upper
protective shield of the analyzer.
Pump Calibration (ISE Configured)

1 Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
2 Enter ISE maintenance screen and click Pump Calibration.
3 Fill a sample tube with at least 500μl deionized water, and then place it in No.40
position of the sample carousel.
4 Continue the procedure until it is completed.
5 After the procedure is completed, the calibration results are displayed. If calibration
is successful, the procedure is completed. If not, ISE enters error status.
Air Bubble Detector Calibration (ISE configured)

1 Ensure ISE is standby.

2 Enter ISE maintenance screen, and select Air Bubble Detector Calibration. The
procedure is performed automatically.
3 After the procedure is completed, the calibration results are displayed. If calibration
is successful, the procedure is completed. If not, ISE enters error status.
Special Wash
2 Place more than 40 mL concentrated wash solution in position 39 of the reagent
carousel.
3 Select Utility – Maintenance – Maintenance – Biochemistry Maintenance, and then
select "Special Wash".
4 Confirm if cuvette check is needed after the concentrated wash. If it is, mark the
checkbox in front of Check Cuvettes.
5 Select "Continue". The system starts cleaning the sample probe, mixers, cuvettes and
wash station. When special wash is finished, the system performs cuvette check
automatically.
6 Select "Done".
7 Restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer.
Cuvette Check
1 Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance and then select
"Cuvette check".
2 After check, check the cuvette check results for yellow indication. Record the
cuvettes highlighted in yellow and wash or replace the cuvettes via a "Replace
Cuvettes" procedure.
Photometer Check
1 Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance and then select
"Photometer Check".
2 If the result is Normal, the system will give no alarms, otherwise the following alarm
will be given.
 If the alarm indicates the lamp is off, check if the lamp has been turn on.
 If the alarm light too strong is given, please perform photometric unit alignment
or check if the photometric unit is normal.
 If the alarm indicates light intensity too weak, replace the lamp.

Checking Waste Pump

1 Power off the analyzing unit, and remove the instrument cover and the upper cover
assembly of the reaction carousel. Run the software to reset the system, and make
the instrument become standby. Use a flat plate to cover the top of the photometer so
that the dark current detection is performed upon startup.
2 Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance- Biochemistry Maintenance, and then select
"Wash Cuvette" so that the system washes the reaction cuvette.
3 In the process of washing the reaction cuvette, check the liquid volume of the cuvette.
If the liquid volume is flush with the cuvette top or overflows the cuvette top, remove
the rear panel, and check and replace the problematic waste pump. The first phase
probe of the wash station corresponds to P02, and the second phase probe and the
third phase probe correspond to P03. If the fourth phase probe is unable to aspirate
the leftover liquid completely, check and replace P04.
4 If the liquid volume is too low in the cuvette washing process, perform an "Wash and
Prime" operation.
5 If everything is checked as normal, install the upper cover assembly on the reaction
carousel and the instrument cover.
Checking deionized water Syringe

1 Place the analyzing unit power to the OFF position, and remove the rear panel of the
instrument. Run the software to reset the system, and make the instrument become
standby.
3 Check whether the 10ml wash syringe leaks. If it leaks, replace the wash syringe. For
the Disassembling Steps, refer to Section 5.8.3 in Chapter 5. Open the maintenance
logs and record related information.
4 If everything is checked as normal, reinstall the rear panel.
Checking Wash Solution Syringe

1 Place the analyzing unit power to the OFF position, and remove the rear panel of the
instrument. Run the software to reset the system, and make the instrument become
standby.
3 Check whether the 2.5ml wash syringe leaks. If it leaks, replace the wash syringe. For
the Disassembling Steps, refer to Section 5.8.3 in Chapter 5. Open the maintenance
logs and record related information.
4 If everything is checked as normal, install the upper cover assembly on the reaction
carousel and the instrument cover.

Checking Probe/Mixer Exterior Wash Flow

1 Open the upper cover of the analyzer and home the system.
2 Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance, and then select "Biochemistry
Maintenance" command.
3 Choose "Prime Probe/Mixer Exterior". The maintenance guide window shows. Select
"Continue".
4 Liquid flows out of the probe and mixer wash well automatically. Observe the liquid
flow of the wash wells. Spillage, overflow or no liquid flow should not occur. The
probe wash height should be no less than 5mm. The liquid in the mixer wash well
should flow out of the its center and form a convex with a height of 1-2mm.
5 Repeat the above steps for three times to check if the probe/mixer flow is normal. If
not, check if the exterior wash tubing is abnormal (Check first if the restrictor ring at
the exterior wash valve outlet is clogged). Check the flow again.
6 Select "Done".
7 Close the maintenance window.


10 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides methods to locate and troubleshoot the errors and problems. Read
this chapter thoroughly to achieve the best performance of the instrument.

10 Troubleshooting

10 Troubleshooting
10.1 Error Codes and Troubleshooting

Table 10.1 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
Error Code Component Event Class Problem Description Flag Probable Causes Corrective Actions
A00006 Middle-layer Error Equipment / E2PROM read/write error. Switch off the analyzing unit power and
unit configuration cannot switch on it again. Recover failure by
be read or saved performing the Home maintenance
procedure. If this message appears for 3
times, contact our customer service
department or your local distributor.
A00007 Middle-layer Error Instruction execute / Instrument instructions cannot 1. Switch off the analyzer power and
unit error. Specific error: be executed. switch on it again. Recover failure by
Error details: performing the Home maintenance
procedure.
2. If this message appears for 3 times,
contact our R&D department.
A01006 Probe unit Error Probe vertical / Probe vertical movement error Probe vertical movement error
movement error 1. Sensor status error: Belt or 1. Sensor status is incorrectCheck if belt
Position: belt pulley is loose.2. Failed to or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so;
Error: find the zero position: 1) The 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1)
Probe horizontal assembly is jammed; 2) Driving Remove obstacle or replace with a new
movement error circuit error; 3) Vertical motor assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace
error; 4) Vertical sensor error; 5) motor; 4) Replace sensor; 5) Tighten
Position:
Belt pulley is loose; 3. Collision properly;
Error: occurs during operation other 3. Collision occurs during operation other
Probe syringe than aspirating: 1) Collision than aspirating: 1) Replace sensor or PCB
movement error sensor or circuit or cable failure; or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3) Rotate
Position: 2) Collision sensor is not blocked positioning sensor to remove dust or
Error: when assembling the sample adjust probe to be vertical; if problem
probe; 3) Incorrect sample probe remains, adjust positioning parameters;
positioning; 4) Incorrect 4) Adjust sample/reagent carousel
(The specific type of
sample/reagent carousel positioning parameters;
error needs to be
positioning; 4. Collision error

10 Troubleshooting
determined and remains: 1) Collision sensor or 4. Collision error remains: 1) Replace
displayed according to circuit or cable failure; 2) sensor or PCB or cable; 2) Reassemble; 3)
the movement result) Collision sensor is not blocked Mount the spring of blocking plate again;
Error: when assembling the sample 5. Vertical movement is not allowed in
Probe vertical probe; 3) Collision sensor is not current horizontal position:Home
movement error blocked due to deformation of instrument or sample probe unit.
blocking plate’s driving spring; 5.
1. Sensor status is
Vertical movement is not allowed
incorrect. Probe horizontal movement error
in current horizontal position:
2. Failed to find the Software error 1. Sensor status is incorrectCheck if belt
zero position. or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so;
3. Collision occurs 2. Failed to find the home position. 1)
Probe horizontal movement error
during operation other Replace PCB; 2) Replace motor; 3)
than aspirating. 1. Sensor status error: Belt or Replace sensor; 4) Tighten properly;
belt pulley is loose.2. Failed to
4. Collision error 3. Collision occurs during horizontal
find the zero position: 1) Driving
remains. movement. 1) Replace PCB; 2) Replace
circuit error; 2) Motor error; 3)
5. Moving vertically is motor; 3) Replace sensor; 4) Tighten
Home position sensor error; 4)
not allowed in current properly;
Belt pulley is loose; 3. Collision
horizontal position. occurs during horizontal 4. Horizontal movement is not allowed in
Probe horizontal movement: 1) Driving circuit current vertical position: Home
movement error error; 2) Motor error; 3) Home instrument or sample probe unit.
1. Sensor status is position sensor error; 4) Belt
incorrect. pulley is loose; 4. Horizontal Probe syringe movement error
2. Failed to find the movement is not allowed in 1. Sensor status is incorrectCheck if belt
zero position. current vertical position: or belt wheel is loose, tighten them if so;
3. Collision occurs Software error 2. Failed to find the zero position: 1)
during horizontal Remove obstacle or replace with a new
movement. Probe syringe movement error assembly; 2) Replace PCB; 3) Replace
4. Moving horizontally 1. Sensor status error: Belt or motor; 4) Replace sensor; 5) Tighten
is not allowed in belt pulley is loose.2. Failed to properly;
current vertical find the zero position: 1) The
position. assembly is jammed; 2) Driving
Probe syringe circuit error; 3) Motor error
movement error 4) Sensor error; 5) Belt pulley is
1. Sensor status is loose.

10 Troubleshooting
incorrect.
2. Failed to find the
zero position.
A01007 Probe unit Warning Sample probe collides / 1) Collision sensor or circuit or 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
with an obstacle when cable failure; 2) Reassemble;
aspiratingPosition:Sam 2) Collision sensor is not blocked 3) Rotate the positioning sensor to
ple ID/bar when assembling the sample remove dust or adjust the probe to be
code:Position: probe; vertical; if problem remains, adjust the
3) Incorrect sample probe positioning parameters;
positioning; 4) Adjust sample/reagent carousel
4) Incorrect sample/reagent positioning parameters.
carousel positioning.
A01024 Probe unit Warning Insufficient sample / 1. No sample is loaded on the 1. Check if there is sufficient sample, and
Position: (diluting designated position; run the test again;
position on reaction 2. Insufficient sample. 2. If there are level detection error,
carousel) 3. Sample probe level detection check sample probe, level detection
Sample ID/bar code: error. board and connecting cable; replace if
any abnormity is identified.
(Probe level detection
failed
Position: (diluting
position on reaction
carousel)
Sample ID/bar code:)
A01028 Probe unit Error The probe detects no / 1. No deionized water or hydro 1. Check if hydro is normal; troubleshoot
fluid level during error; if there is any abnormity;
washing. 2. Sample probe level detection 2. If level detection error is identified,
error. check probe, level detection board and
connecting cable; replace if any
abnormity is identified.
A01033 Probe unit Warning The probe detects no / 1. There is no reagent or 1. Check if R1 volume is sufficient and
fluid level on reaction insufficient reagent in the the reagent bottle is free of air bubbles,
carousel when cuvette; and then try again;2. Check if the vertical
dispensing.Cuvette 2. Incorrect vertical extreme extreme position parameter for sample
No.:Sample ID/bar probe on reaction carousel is correct;3. If

10 Troubleshooting
code:Chemistry:(Prob position parameter for sample there are level detection error, check
e level detection probe on reaction carousel; sample probe, level detection board and
failedCuvette 3. Sample probe level detection connecting cable; replace if any
No.:Sample ID/bar error. abnormity is identified.
code:Chemistry:)
A01039 Probe unit Error Instruction execute / Instrument instructions cannot 1. Switch off the analyzer power and
error. Specific error: be executed. switch on it again. Recover failure by
procedure.
A02007 Probe unit Warning Sample probe collides / 1) Collision sensor or circuit or 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
with an obstacle when cable failure; 2) Reassemble;
aspirating 2) Collision sensor is not blocked 3) Rotate the positioning sensor to
Reagent position: when assembling the sample remove dust or adjust the probe to be
Position: probe; vertical; if problem remains, adjust the
3) Incorrect sample probe positioning parameters;
positioning; 4) Adjust sample/reagent carousel
4) Incorrect sample/reagent positioning parameters.
carousel positioning.
A02023 Probe unit Warning Insufficient / 1. There is no reagent or 1. Check if the reagent is sufficient, and
reagentChemistry:Posi insufficient reagent on the then try again.2. If there are level
tion:(Probe level designated position; detection error, check sample probe,
detection 2. Sample probe level detection level detection board and connecting
failedChemistry:Positi error. cable; replace if any abnormity is
on:) identified.
A02025 Probe unit Error The probe dispenses / 1. The reagent probe aspirates 1. Check if the reagent meets the
insufficient reagent. nothing. requirement and is sufficient in volume,
Cuvette No.: 2. Syringe assembly error. and then try again.
Sample ID/bar code: 2. Check if there is any abnormity of
Chemistry: syringe assembly.
A02027 Probe unit Warning Water residues exist in / deionized water residual exists in Check if aspirating tubing and solenoid
the cuvette cuvette. valves of wash station is normal;

10 Troubleshooting
Cuvette No.:
Sample ID/bar code:
Chemistry:
(Probe level detection

failed
Cuvette No.:
Sample ID/bar code:
Chemistry:)
A05006 Mixer Error Mixer vertical / Mixer vertical movement error Mixer vertical movement error
movement error 1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error
Position: Belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
Error: 2. Failed to find the zero tighten them if so;
position. 2. Failed to find the zero position.
Mixer horizontal 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
movement error 2) Driving circuit error; new assembly;
Position: 3) Vertical motor error; 2) Replace PCB;
Error: 4) Vertical sensor error; 3) Replace motor;
5) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Replace sensor;
Mixer vertical 3. Vertical movement is not 5) Tighten properly;
movement error allowed in current horizontal 3. Vertical movement is not allowed in
1. Sensor status is position. current horizontal position.
incorrect. Software error Reset the whole unit or the relevant unit.
2. Failed to find the Mixer horizontal movement error Mixer horizontal movement error
zero position. 1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error
3. Moving vertically is Belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
not allowed in current tighten them if so;
2. Failed to find the zero
horizontal position.
position. 2. Failed to find the zero position.
1) Driving circuit error; 1) Replace PCB;
Mixer horizontal
2) Motor error; 2) Replace motor;
movement error
3) Home position sensor error; 3) Replace sensor;
1. Sensor status is
incorrect. 4) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Tighten properly;
2. Failed to find the 3. Horizontal movement is not 3. Horizontal movement is not allowed in

10 Troubleshooting
zero position. allowed in current vertical current vertical position.
3. Moving horizontally position. Reset the whole unit or the relevant unit.
is not allowed in Software error
current vertical
position.
A05007 Mixer Unit Error Instruction execute / Instrument instructions cannot 1. Switch off the analyzer power and
procedure.
A06006 Reaction Error Reaction carousel / Reaction carousel movement 1. Failed to find the home position;
Carousel movement error error Replace sensor or cable
Unit Error: 1. Failed to find the zero 2. The coder missed steps
1. Failed to find the position. 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a new
zero position. Home position sensor error assembly;
2. The coder missed 2. The coder missed steps 2) Replace PCB;
steps 1) Assembly is jammed; 3) Replace motor;
3. The reagent 2) Driving circuit error; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
carousel inner ring 3) Motor error; 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
missed steps when
4) Sensor error; assembly;
moving to the home
position. 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3. The reagent carousel inner ring missed
3. The reagent carousel inner steps when moving to the home position.
ring missed steps when moving to Replace sensor or cable
the home position.
Home position sensor error
A06007 Reaction Error Filter wheel / 1. Software instruction execute 1. Switch off the analyzer power and
Carousel movement error error switch on it again. Recover failure by
Unit 2. The filter wheel motor goes performing the Home maintenance
wrong. procedure.
3. The home position sensor of 2. Check if the cable of the filter wheel
the filter wheel goes wrong. motor and the sensor are normal.
3. Check if the filter wheel motor and the

10 Troubleshooting
sensor are faulty.
A06008 Reaction Error Instruction execute / Instrument instructions cannot 1. Switch off the analyzer power and
Carousel error. Specific error: be executed. switch on it again. Recover failure by
Unit Error details: performing the Home maintenance
procedure.
A07006 Sample/reag Error Sample/Reagent / Sample/Reagent carousel Sample/Reagent carousel movement
ent carousel carousel movement movement error. error.
unit error. 1. Failed to find the zero 1. Failed to find the zero position.
Error: position. Replace sensor or cable
1. Failed to find the Home position sensor error 2. The coder missed steps
zero position. 2. The coder missed steps 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
2. The coder missed 1) Assembly is jammed; new assembly;
steps 2) Driving circuit error; 2) Replace PCB;
3. The reagent 3) Motor error; 3) Replace motor;
carousel inner ring
4) Sensor error; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
missed steps when
moving to the home 5) Belt pulley is loose; 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
position. 3. The reagent carousel inner assembly;
ring missed steps when moving to 3. The reagent carousel inner ring missed
the home position. steps when moving to the home position.
Home position sensor error Replace sensor or cable
A07009 Sample/reag Error Sample bar code / Sample bar code reader Recover the failure. If the error remains,
ent carousel reader error connection error due to system initialize the sample bar code reader. If
unit failure. If this occurs repeatedly, initialization cannot be performed, check
and failure recovery cannot be if bar code reader is connected properly.
performed, bar code reader is If problem remains, replace bar code
not initialized correctly, or reader or control driver board.
communication cable is
disconnected.
If bar code reader is not
available, please try again.

10 Troubleshooting
A07010 Sample/reag Warning Sample bar code / Sample bar code reader does not Perform the bar code scan operation
ent carousel errorPosition work normally due to again. If problem remains, check bar
unit communication error. code reader connection, replace bar code
reader and control driver board.
A07011 Sample/reag Error Sample bar code / Sample bar code sending buffer Recover the failure or reboot the
ent carousel sending buffer is full is full due to communication analyzing unit.
unit error.
A09011 Sample/reag Error Reagent bar code / Reagent bar code reader Recover the failure. If the error remains,
ent carousel reader does not work connection error due to system initialize the sample bar code reader. If
unit normally failure. If this occurs repeatedly, initialization cannot be performed, check
disconnected.
If bar code reader is not
available, please try again.
A09012 Sample/reag Warning Reagent bar code / Communication error. Reagent Perform the bar code scan operation
ent carousel reader data error bar code instruction buffer is again. If problem remains, check bar
unit Reagent position: full. code reader connection, replace bar code
reader and control driver board.
A09014 Sample/reag Error Reagent bar code / Reagent bar code reader does Recover the failure or reboot the
ent carousel sending buffer is full not work normally due to analyzing unit.
unit Reagent position: communication error.
A11005 Wash unit Error Wash station / 1. Sensor status error 1. Sensor status error
movement error Belt pulley is loose; Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
Error: 2. Home position is not found. tighten them if so;
1. Movement error 1) Driving circuit error; 2. Home position is not found.
2. The wash station 2) Motor error; 1) Replace PCB;
collides with an 3) Home position sensor error; 2) Replace motor;
obstacle when 3) Replace sensor;
4) Belt pulley is loose;
moving.
3. The wash station collides with 4) Tighten properly;
an obstacle when moving. 3. The wash station collides with an

10 Troubleshooting
1) Wash probes are not vertical; obstacle when moving.
2) Reaction carousel positioning 1) Align wash probes;
is deviated; 2) Align reaction carousel positioning;
3) Collision sensor or circuit 3) Replace sensor, cable or PCB
error (Only BS-240)
(Only BS-240)
A11013 Wash unit Warning Water tank is empty / 1. Water tank is empty and not 1. Check if the water level inside the
filled. water tank is low and replenish.2. Check
2. The low-level floater of the if the error is accidental.
water tank goes wrong. 3. If the error is not accidental, contact
our customer service department or your
local distributor.
A11015 Wash unit Warning Diluted wash solution / 1. Diluted wash solution tank is 1. Replenish the diluted wash solution
tank is empty. empty and not filled. until the tank is full.
2. The low-level floater of the 2. Check if the low-level floater signal of
diluted wash solution tank goes the diluted wash solution tank is correct.
wrong. (Only BS-240)
(Only BS-240)
A11020 Wash unit Warning High concentration / 1. The high concentration waste 1. Check the high-concentration waste
waste tank is full tank is full tank. If the tank is full, replace it. Cover
2. The floater of the high the full tank and dispose of the waste
concentration waste tank goes properly.
wrong. 2. Check if high-concentration waste goes
(Only BS-240) wrong.
(Only BS-240)
A11034 Wash unit Error Deionized water / 1. Sensor status error. 1. Replace sensor or cable;
syringe movement 2. The syringe assembly is 2. Remove obstacle or replace with a new
error. probably forced to move. assembly;
1. Sensor status is 3. Failed to find the zero 3. Replace drive board.
incorrect. position. 4. Replace the motor;
2. Failed to find the 1) Assembly is jammed; (Only BS-240)
mechanical zero 2) Driving circuit error;
position.
3) Motor error;
4) Sensor error;

10 Troubleshooting
(Only BS-240)
A11038 Wash unit Error Instruction execute / Instrument instructions cannot 1. Switch off the analyzer power and
procedure.
A12005 Temperature Warning Reaction carousel / 1. The ambient temperature is 1. Reproduce failure.
Control Unit temperature is out of out of range. 2. Detect ambient temperature to check
range 2. The temperature sensor goes if it is out of range.
TDISP temperature: wrong. (component error, cable 3. Temperature sensor error: check for
TS01: error) any signs of short circuit or broken
3. The temperature protection circuit; check if connections are secure.
switch goes wrong. (component 4. Temperature protection switch error:
error, cable error) check if protection switch is shut and
4. The heater goes wrong. connections are secure.
(component error, cable error) 5. Heater error: check if resistance under
5. The fan goes wrong. normal temperature is correct, and
(component error, cable error) connections are secure.
6. PCB error 6. Fan error: check if fan is working
7. Parameters are lost. normally, and connections are secure.
8. Electromagnetic interference 7. PCB error
exists. 8. Parameters are lost: check if
temperature control parameters are
correct.
9. Electromagnetic interference exists.
A12006 Temperature Warning Temperature of wash / 1. The ambient temperature is 1. Reproduce failure.
Control Unit solution for cleaning out of range. 2. Detect ambient temperature to check
cuvettes is out of 2. The temperature sensor goes if it is out of range.
range wrong. (component error, cable 3. Temperature sensor error: check for
Temperature: error) any signs of short circuit or broken

10 Troubleshooting
5. PCB error normal temperature is correct, and
6. Parameters are lost. connections are secure.
(Only BS-240) temperature control parameters are
correct.
(Only BS-240)
A12007 Temperature Warning Temperature of / 1. The ambient temperature is 1. Reproduce failure.
Control Unit deionized water for out of range. 2. Detect ambient temperature to check
cleaning cuvettes is 2. The temperature sensor goes if it is out of range.
out of range wrong. (component error, cable 3. Temperature sensor error: check for
Temperature: error) any signs of short circuit or broken
(Only BS-240) temperature control parameters are
correct.
(Only BS-240)
A12010 Temperature Warning Reagent preheating / 1. The ambient temperature is 1. Reproduce failure.
Control Unit temperature is out of out of range. 2. Detect ambient temperature to check
range. 2. The temperature sensor goes if it is out of range.
wrong. (component error, cable 3. Temperature sensor error: check for
error) any signs of short circuit or broken

10 Troubleshooting
temperature control parameters are
correct.
A21001 Wash unit Error Wash solution syringe / 1. Sensor status error. 1. Replace sensor or cable;
movement error. 2. The syringe assembly is 2. Remove obstacle or replace with a new
1. Sensor status is probably forced to move. assembly;
incorrect. 3. Failed to find the zero 3. Replace drive board.
2. Failed to find the position. 4. Replace the motor;
mechanical zero 1) Assembly is jammed; (Only BS-240)
position. 2) Driving circuit error;
3) Motor error;
4) Sensor error;
(Only BS-240)
A22001 ISE module Error Slope out of / 1. Electrode is not installed 1. Remove and reinstall the electrode.
range.Electrode: correctly. 2. Replace the calibrator.
2. Calibration is invalid. 3. Replace the failed electrode and run
3. Electrode is degenerated. tests again.
4. Bubbles exist inside reference 4. Remove the electrode, clap it to
electrode. remove the bubbles, reinstall it, and then
5. Reference electrode has been run calibration.
used for a long time. 5. Replace the reference electrode and
6. Electrodes interfere with each run tests again.
other. 6. Replace electrode by different
7. Module or fluidic temperature combinations to troubleshoot the failed

10 Troubleshooting
exceeds 32°C. one.
7. Monitor the temperature. If the
ambient temperature is too high, move
the instrument to another position.
8. If the problem persists, contact
Mindray.
A22002 ISE module Error Air in sample, / 1. Sample is insufficient, or 1. Increase the sample volume. Place
position: contains bubbles after being enough sample in the tube, at least 90μl
dispensed. for ISE measurement.
2. No or insufficient sample is 2. Electrode is not installed correctly.
dispensed to the injection port. Reinstall it.
3. Leaks exist due to improper 3. Check the waste tube, and if
installation of electrode. necessary, replace it.
4. Waste pump tube is aging or
broken.
A22004 ISE module Error ISE unit cannot be / 1. Power supply of ISE module 1. Replace the 24V power supply board of
connected. goes wrong. the ISE module.
2. Communication cable between 2. Replace the communication cable.
ISE module and middle-layer unit 3. Replace the interface or pins.
goes wrong. 4. Replace the main control board of the
3. Communication interface or ISE module.
pins go wrong.
4. Main control board of the ISE
module goes wrong.
A22005 ISE module Error ISE unit response error / 1. Communication cable between 1. Replace the communication cable.
ISE module and middle-layer unit 2. Replace the interface or pins.
goes wrong. 3. Replace the main control board of the
2. Communication interface or ISE module.
pins go wrong. 4. Upgrade or reinstall the software.
3. Main control board of the ISE
module goes wrong.
4. Software error
A22006 ISE module Error Purge A and B failed. / 1. Leaks exist due to improper 1. Reinstall the electrode and check for
installation of electrode or O the O ring.

10 Troubleshooting
ring's missing. 2. Use warm water to rinse the sample
2. Sample injection port of injection port, and unclog the electrode
electrode inside is blocked. tube. Check the inside of the reference
3. Calibrator in the reagent pack electrode for salt buildup.
is exhausted. 3. Replace the reagent pack.
4. Purge cycle is not enough. 4. Increase the prime cycle.
5. Peristaltic pump tube is aging, 5. Replace the pump tube.
blocked or broken. 6. Use warm water to unclog the wand
6. Calibrator cannot be output tube.
due to the blocked wand tube.
A22007 ISE module Warning ISE reagent is going to / Calibrator is exhausted. Replace the reagent pack with a new one.
be exhausted.
A22008 ISE module Error Electrode Voltage / 1. Electrode or reagent pack is 1. Replace the failed electrode or reagent
Overflow invalid. pack.
Electrode: 2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode can become stable only
3. New reagent pack is unstable. after 15 minutes since installation.
4. Reference electrode has been 3. Multiple calibrations are required after
used for over 6 months. installing new reagent pack.
5. Main control board of the ISE 4. Replace the reference electrode.
module goes wrong. 5. Replace the main control board.
A22009 ISE module Error Electrode slope drift. / 1. Electrode or reagent pack is 1. Replace the failed electrode or reagent
Electrode voltage invalid. pack.
drift.Electrode: 2. Electrode is unsteady. 2. New electrode can become stable only
3. New reagent pack is unstable. after 15 minutes since installation.
4. Reference electrode has been 3. Multiple calibrations are required after
used for over 6 months. installing new reagent pack.
5. Main control board of the ISE 4. Replace the reference electrode.
module goes wrong. 5. Replace the main control board.
6. The ambient temperature is 6. Monitor the ambient temperature and
fluctuating greatly. ensure the fluctuation is within ±4.

10 Troubleshooting
A22010 ISE module Error Electrode Voltage / 1. Electrode failure. 1. Replace the electrode.
Noise 2. Environment interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
Electrode: 3. Main control board of the ISE 3. Replace the main control board of the
module goes wrong. ISE module.
4. Fluidic leaks exist, resulting in 4. Clean the tube and electrode.
salt buildup around the electrode
or tube.
A22011 ISE module Error Air in calibrator B / 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new
2. Calibrator B tube contains one.
many air bubbles. 2. Perform purge B to remove air bubbles.
3. Peristaltic pump B tube is 3 and 4. Replace the peristaltic pump
aging, clogged and broken. tube.
4. Waste pump tube is aging, 5. Clean the sample injection port, or
clogged and broken. reinstall the electrode.
5. The sample injection port and 6. Replace the air bubble detector.
fluidic tube is blocked or leaking.
6. The air bubble detector is
invalid.
A22012 ISE module Error Air in calibrator A / 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a new
2. Calibrator A tube contains one.
many air bubbles. 2. Perform purge A to remove air bubbles.
3. Peristaltic pump A tube is 3 and 4. Replace the peristaltic pump
aging, clogged and broken. tube.
invalid.
A22013 ISE module Error Pump calibration / 1. Peristaltic pump tube is aging. 1. Replace the pump tube.
result error 2. Aspiration and dispensing of 2. Replace the sample probe.
sample probe goes wrong.

10 Troubleshooting
A22014 ISE module Error Bubble detector / 1. Air bubble detector board is Replace the air bubble detector.
failure. eroded due to the leaks at the
joint of sample injection port
and bubble detector.
invalid.
A22015 ISE module Error Reagent pack chip / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install the reagent pack.
reading error. Load 2. Reagent pack wand is failed. 2. Install the reagent pack wand.
the reagent pack
again.
A22016 ISE module Error Cannot write into the / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install the reagent pack.
chip of reagent pack. 2. Reagent pack wand is failed. 2. Install the reagent pack wand.
A22017 ISE module Error Air in ISE wash / 1. ISE wash solution is 1. Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
solution insufficient. 2. Replace the peristaltic pump tube.
invalid.
A22018 ISE module Error The ISE tube has no / 1. ISE wash solution is 1. Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
liquid or has leaks. insufficient. 2. Replace the peristaltic pump tube.
invalid.
A22019 ISE module Error Stored calibration / 1. Communication cable is 1. Replace the communication cable.
value error. disconnected. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
2. The interface and pins are 3. Replace the main control board of the
faulty. ISE module.
3. Main control board of the

10 Troubleshooting
module goes wrong. 4. Upgrade or reinstall the software.
4. Unmatched software version.
A22021 ISE module Error Command format or / 1. Communication cable is 1. Replace the communication cable.
execution error disconnected. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
faulty. ISE module.
3. Main control board of the 4. Upgrade or reinstall the software.
module goes wrong.
A22022 ISE module Error Air in segment / 1. ISE wash solution is 1. Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
insufficient. 2. Replace the peristaltic pump tube.
invalid.
A22023 ISE module Error No reagent module / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install the reagent pack.
has been loaded. 2. Reader/writer error. 2. Install the reagent pack wand.
A22024 ISE module Error ISE response check / 1. Communication cable is 1. Replace the communication cable.
code error disconnected. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
faulty. ISE module.
3. Main control board of the 4. Upgrade or reinstall the software.
module goes wrong.
A22027 / Error Fluidic prime failed. / Fluidic prime is not performed. Switch off the analyzing unit power and
switch on it again. If this message
appears for 3 times, contact our customer
service department or your local
distributor.

10 Troubleshooting
A22036 / Error Initializing sample bar / Sample bar code reader Recover the failure. If the error remains,
code reader failed. connection error due to system initialize the sample bar code reader. If
failure. If this occurs repeatedly, initialization cannot be performed, check
disconnected.
A22038 / Error Scanning reagent bar / Scanning reagent bar code failed. Contact our R&D department.
code failed.
A22039 / Error Unmatched software / 1. Executing version query 1. Switch off the analyzing unit power
version. instruction failed. 2. Returned and switch on it again.
control software version and that 2. If this message appears for 3 times,
stored in the operating software contact our customer service department
does not match. or your local distributor.
C00007 Operating Error CPU error / The CPU is too busy. Reboot the computer and operating
system software. If this message appears for 3
times, contact our customer service
C00011 Operating Error The operating / The operating software is After rebooting the software, perform the
system software has not been abnormal or the analyzer is special wash procedure.
closed normally. powered off accidentally.
C00012 Operating Warning Sound card failure / No sound card is installed. Sound Reinstall the sound card or the sound card
system card failure. Incorrect sound card driver.
driver.
C00013 Operating Error The last abnormal exit / The operating software did not Remove and check the idle reaction
system may cause absence of exit normally for reasons such cuvette segment on the reaction
update of the reaction power failure. (Only BS-230) carousel. If the cuvette segment has been
cuvette status. Check used, replace it; or, if it is not sure
the reaction cuvette whether the cuvette segment has been
manually and replace used, still replace it. (Only BS-230)
it with a new cuvette
to ensure accurate

10 Troubleshooting
results.
C01001 System Error Equipment cannot be / The serial cable is not Check the serial port connection. Replug
communicati connected connected; or the analyzer the cable. Check if the analyzing unit are
on power is switched off. powered on. Start the initialization again.
Restart the computer and analyzing unit.
If three continuous attempts are failed,
contact our customer service department
or your local distributor.
C02001 Database Error Database initializing / Database software is not Install database software; re-establish
failed installed; database is not database; if problem remains, contact
established; database system or our R&D department
database file is damaged or lost;
database is opened exclusively
C02002 Database Error Database upgrade / Database upgrade failed Install database software; re-establish
failed database; if problem remains, contact
our R&D department
C02004 Database Warning Data backup failed / Database record is being used. Back up database again; if problem
Database is locked. remains, contact our R&D department
C02005 Database Warning Reading/Writing / Cannot read or write necessary Check if database has been damaged;
database failed information from or into contact our R&D department
database
C03001 Result Warning Result cannot be RCE Absorbance data for calculation Investigate the cause of photoelectric
calculation calculatedSample is incomplete, or the dividend is data loss; contact our R&D department
ID/bar 0.
code:Position:Chemist
ry:
C03002 Result Warning Absorbance out of ABS The absorbance measured at the 1. Check the reaction curve. If R1
calculation range primary and secondary absorbency is too high, check whether
Sample ID/bar code: wavelength is greater than 3.3A. the reagent has bubbles or the syringe
Position: leaks.
2. Check if the reagent is installed
correctly.

10 Troubleshooting
3. Rerun the test after diluting the
reagent.
4. Contact our customer service
C03003 Result Warning R1 blank absorbance RBK The reagent goes wrong; the Check if cuvette is clean or overflowed;
calculation out of range cuvette is not clear; the reaction check if reagent is sufficient, without air
Sample ID/bar code: cuvette is overflowed; or bubbles; check if chemistry parameters
Position: insufficient reagent is are reasonable; if previous problems do
dispensed.(BS-240) not exist, replace reagent and rerun the
Chemistry:
The reagent goes wrong; the test (BS-240).
reagent is not replenished Check if reagent is sufficient (if reagent
enough.(BS-230) bottle contains air bubbles); check if
chemistry parameters are reasonable; if
previous problems do not exist, replace
reagent and rerun the test (BS-230).
C03004 Result Warning Substrate depletion BOE The sample concentration is too Check the reaction curve and the
calculation Sample ID/bar code: high, and substrate depletion substrate depletion limit. Rerun the test
Position: occurs during fixed-time with diluted sample.
measurements.
Chemistry:
C03005 Result Warning Result cannot be ENC The sample concentration is too Check the reaction curve and the
calculation calculatedSample high, and substrate depletion substrate depletion limit. Rerun the test
ID/bar occurs within the lag time of rate with diluted sample.
code:Position:Chemist check measurements.
ry:
C03006 Result Warning Linearity limit out of LIN The measuring points for result Check the reaction curve and the
calculation range calculation are nonlinear, substrate depletion limit. Rerun the test
Sample ID/bar code: because the sample with diluted sample.
Position: concentration is too high, or the
substrate depletion limit is not
Chemistry:
specified or unreasonable.
C03007 Result Warning Prozone check error PRO Antigen excess occurs due to too Check the reaction curve and the prozone
calculation Sample ID/bar code: high sample concentration. check parameters. Rerun the test with
Position: diluted sample.

10 Troubleshooting
Chemistry:
C03008 Result Warning Sample concentration RRN The sample concentration Rerun the test with diluted sample.
calculation is higher than that of exceeds the high limit of the
the highest-level calibrator concentration.
calibrator
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
Chemistry:
C03009 Result Warning Mixed blank MBK The reagent goes wrong; the Check if the cuvette is clear and not
calculation absorbance out of cuvette is not clear; the reaction overflowed, the reagent is sufficient
rangeChemistry: cuvette is overflowed; or without air bubbles, and the chemistry
insufficient reagent is dispensed. parameters are reasonable. If yes,
replace the reagent and then rerun the
test.
C03010 Result Warning Blank response out of BLK The reagent goes wrong; Check if the cuvette is not overflowed,
calculation range insufficient reagent is dispensed; the reagent is sufficient without air
Chemistry the cuvette contains air bubbles; bubbles, the light does not drift and the
the light drifts; or the cuvette is chemistry parameters are reasonable. If
overflowed.(BS-240) yes, replace the reagent and then rerun
The reagent goes wrong; the test (BS-240).
insufficient reagent is dispensed; Check if reagent is sufficient (if reagent
the cuvette contains air bubbles; bottle contains air bubbles); check if
the light drifts.(BS-230) chemistry parameters are reasonable; if
the light drifts, if previous problems do
not exist, replace reagent and rerun the
test (BS-230).
C03011 Result Warning Calibration DUP The difference between the Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation repeatability out of maximum and minimum response reasonable, troubleshoot the error, and
range. of the calibrator exceeds the then recalibrate.
Chemistry: specified limit.
C03012 Result Warning Calibration sensitivity SEN The difference of final response Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation out of range. of the maximum and minimum reasonable and the reagent and calibrator
Chemistry: concentration calibrators are normal, and then recalibrate.

10 Troubleshooting
exceeds the specified limit.
C03013 Result Warning Calibration curve CSD The calculated standard Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation standard deviation out deviation of the calibration curve reasonable and the reagent and calibrator
of range. Chemistry: exceeds the specified limit. are normal, and then recalibrate.
C03014 Result Warning Calibration DET The calculated fit of the Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation determination calibration curve exceeds the reasonable and the reagent and calibrator
coefficient out of specified limit. are normal, and then recalibrate.
range
Chemistry:
C03015 Result Warning Calibration coefficient FAC The slope difference is Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation differential limit applicable to linear calibration reasonable and the reagent and calibrator
exceeds limit. only and refers to the K factor are normal, and then recalibrate.
Chemistry: (slope) difference between two
adjacent calibrations. It exceeds
the specified limit.
C03016 Result Warning Calibration curve not MON The calibration data and Check if the calibrator is defined and
calculation monotonic. calibration curve are not placed correctly, and then recalibrate.
Chemistry: monotonic.
C03017 Result Warning Calibration curve is COV For nonlinear calibration, a Check that the reagent and calibrator are
calculation not satisfying base cannot be normal, and then recalibrate. If
convergent.Chemistry: calculated and no calibration troubleshooting fails, choose other
curve is drawn. calibration rules and recalibrate.
C03018 Result Warning Chemistry: 12s The QC result is between ±2 and No actions are required.
calculation Control: 1-2S warning ±3 standard deviations from the
assigned mean concentration.
C03019 Result Warning Chemistry: 13s The current QC result is greater Check if the reagent is qualified, control
calculation Control: 1-3S out of than ±3 standard deviations from sample is normal, and the instrument is
control the assigned mean working correctly.
concentration.

10 Troubleshooting
C03020 Result Warning Chemistry: 22s Results of two controls in the Check if the reagent is qualified, control
calculation Control: 2-2S out of same run or two continuous sample is normal, and the instrument is
control results of a control are on the working correctly.
same side and greater than ±2
standard deviations from the
assigned mean concentration.
C03021 Result Warning Chemistry: R4s One result of a run is greater Check if the reagent is qualified, control
calculation Control: R-4S out of than +2 standard deviations from sample is normal, and the instrument is
control the assigned mean and the other working correctly.
greater than -2SDs.
C03022 Result Warning Chemistry: 41s Results of two runs (4 results), or Check if the reagent is qualified, control
calculation Control: 4-1S out of 4 continuous results of a control sample is normal, and the instrument is
control are on the same side and greater working correctly.
than ±1 standard deviation from
the assigned mean
concentration.
C03023 Result Warning Chemistry: 10x Results of recent 5 runs, or 10 Check if the reagent is qualified, control
calculation Control: 10-X out of continuous results of a control sample is normal, and the instrument is
control are on the same side. working correctly.
C03024 Result Error Test period timed out; / 1. Software error Rerun the test, or reboot the operating
calculation Cannot continue 2. Operating system error software and analyzing unit. If the error
remains, contact our customer service
C03026 Result Warning Photoelectric data is / Communication error. If the error persists, contact our R&D
calculation lost department.
C03030 Result Error Photoelectric TD Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
calculation measurement is time 2. Restart the analyzing unit.
out 3. If problem remains, contact our R&D
Sample ID/bar code: department.
Position:

10 Troubleshooting
Chemistry:
C03031 Result Error Multiple photoelectric / Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
calculation measurements are 2. Restart the analyzing unit.
time outSample 3. If problem remains, contact our R&D
ID/bar code: Position: department.
C04001 Sample bar Warning Duplicate sample bar / Duplicate bar code is used. Replace the duplicate sample bar code
code code. Sample ID/bar label.
code: %s Position 1: %s
Position 2: %s
C04002 Sample bar Warning Corresponding / The sample of the bar code has Program the sample of the bar code.
code program information not been programmed.
does not exist
Sample ID/bar code:
Position
(sample/reagent
carousel position)
C04006 Sample bar Warning Sample is expired. / The sample is loaded after its The sample is expired. Replace the
code Sample ID/bar code: shelf life is exceeded. sample and program it again. Reject the
Position expired sample. If the sample shelf life is
(sample/reagent too short, change it to a reasonable one.
carousel position)
C04008 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code is / The bar code length is greater Redefine the bar code with no more than
code longer than 27 digits. than the maximum value of 27 27 digits.
Position digits.
(sample/reagent
carousel position)
C04009 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code is / The bar code length is less than Redefine the bar code with no less than 3
code less than 3 digits. the minimum value of 3 digits. digits.
Sample bar code: ,
Position:
C04012 Sample bar Warning Sample bar code / Bar code data does not accord Reset the bar code format, or reprint and

10 Troubleshooting
code analysis error Sample with the defined format. scan the bar code.
bar code: Position:
C05001 Reagent bar Warning Duplicate reagent bar / Incorrect reagent or reagent bar Reprint the reagent bar code, or replace
code code code is being used, or an invalid the reagent bottle with an invalid bar
Position 1: reagent bar code is being used in code.
Position 2: a closed-reagent system. Closed-
reagent bar code is aligned with
closed reagents, and cannot be
used again for new reagent when
a reagent is exhausted.
C05002 Reagent bar Warning Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is Print the new reagent bar code with
code information error. being used, or reagent bar code correct settings and check the bar code
Position: is not configured reasonably. The against the settings. In the case of a
reagent bar code contains closed-reagent system, replace the
incomplete or incorrect reagent reagent bottle, or contact the reagent
information, such as expiration supplier.
date, reagent volume, etc.
C05003 Reagent bar Warning Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is Check the reagent bar code settings, or
code analysis error.Position: being used, or reagent bar code reprint the reagent bar code against the
settings are incorrect. Non- settings. In the case of a closed-reagent
closed reagent bar code is being system, contact the reagent supplier.
used in a closed-reagent system.
The system fails to extract
reagent information from the bar
code.
C05006 Reagent bar Error Wash solution position / Reagent rather than wash Reposition the reagent, or remove it from
code on sample/reagent solution is placed in the fixed the fixed wash solution position.
carousel is occupied wash solution position on
by another reagent. sample/reagent carousel.
Position:
C05008 Reagent bar Error Physiological saline / Reagent rather than physiological Reposition the reagent, or remove it from
code position on saline is placed in the fixed the fixed wash solution position.
sample/reagent physiological saline position on
carousel is occupied sample/reagent carousel.
by another reagent.
Position:

10 Troubleshooting
C05010 / Warning / / The pretreat reagent position is Check if the reagent is placed correctly
occupied by other reagent. and if the reagent position is set correctly
(Only BS-240) (Only BS-240).
C05011 / Warning / / The ISE wash solution position is Check if the reagent is placed correctly
occupied by other reagent. and if the reagent position is set
correctly.
C06001 LIS Error LIS initialization error / Host file is damaged or does not Reboot operating software; initialize LIS
communicati exist. module
on
C06002 LIS Error LIS communication / Host parameters error Check system configuration parameters;
communicati parameter error re-connect LIS
on
C06003 LIS Error LIS communication / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally, send or
communicati error receive the instruction again. If the error
on occurs for several times, contact LIS
vendor. If problem remain, contact our
R&D department.
C06004 LIS Error LIS host cannot be / Abnormal network connection, or Check if LIS host and LIS station is started
communicati connected the LIS host is not started. normally.
on
C06005 LIS Warning Sending sample results / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally, send or
communicati failed. receive the instruction again. If the error
on Sample ID/bar code: occurs for several times, contact LIS
Position: vendor. If problem remain, contact our
R&D department.
C06006 LIS Error Sending sample / Communication failure If the error occurs accidentally, send or
communicati information failed. receive the instruction again. If the error
on Sample ID/bar code: occurs for several times, contact LIS
Position: vendor. If problem remain, contact our
R&D department.

10 Troubleshooting
C06007 LIS Warning Inquiring sample / LIS server failure. If the error occurs accidentally, neglect
communicati information failed it. Neglect the error. If the error occurs
on Sample ID/bar code: for several times, contact LIS vendor. If
Position: the problem remains, contact our
customer service department or your
local distributor.
C06008 LIS Warning Downloading sample / Incorrect channel settings; or Check and re-set the chemistry
communicati failed. insufficient or redundant correspondence between the operating
on Sample ID/bar code: chemistries on the LIS host. software and the LIS host.
Position:
C07003 Light Source Error Light intensity is too / 1. The lamp is not installed 1. Check if the lamp is installed correctly.
weak correctly. 2. Perform the special wash procedure
2. The cuvette is contaminated. and then the lamp check procedure (only
3. The lamp is aging. BS-240).
4. The wash station dispenses 3. Replace the lamp.
liquid incorrectly (only BS-240). 4. Check if the wash station dispenses
liquid with correct volume to reaction
cuvettes (only BS-240).
5. Check if the cables on the AD
collection board are installed correctly.
6. Replace the AD collection board.
7. If the problem remains, contact the
R&D department of Mindray.
C07004 Light Source Warning Cuvette blank out of / 1. The cuvette is contaminated. 1. Replace or clean the failed cuvette.
range 2. The lamp is aging. 2. Check if the lamp is installed correctly.
Cuvette No.: XX 3. The lamp is not installed 3. Perform the diluted wash procedure
correctly. and then the cuvette check procedure.
4. The wash station dispenses 5. Replace the lamp.
liquid incorrectly. 6. Check if the wash station dispenses
5. The photoelectric collection liquid with correct volume to reaction
board goes wrong. cuvettes.
(Only BS-240) 6. Check if the cables on the AD

10 Troubleshooting
(Only BS-240)
C07005 Light Source Error Lamp is not turned on / 1. The lamp is damaged. 1. Open the reaction carousel and check
2. The lamp cable is not if the lamp is turned on. If it is not, rerun
connected properly. the operating software.2. Check if the
3. The power board of the lamp lamp cable is tightened.3. Replace the
is not connected properly. lamp.4. Check if the connect of the lamp
power board is loose, and if necessary,
4. The power supply of the
reinsert the connector.5. Check if the
analyzing unit is disconnected.
cables on the AD collection board are
5. The photoelectric collection installed correctly.6. Replace the AD
board goes wrong. collection board.7. If the problem
remains, contact the R&D department of
Mindray.
C07006 Light Source Error Light intensity is too / 1. A cuvette position has no 1. Check if all cuvette positions have
strong cuvette installed. cuvettes installed.
2. The circuit gain is too high and 2. Readjust the gain or(/and) lamp
beyond the measurement range. voltage.
C07007 Light Source Error Dark current is too / 1. The circuit gain is too high and 1. Perform dark current fluctuation test
high beyond the measurement range. to identify failure.
2. The power board of the lamp 2. Check if the abnormal channel has
is not connected properly. something to do with the channel gain. If
3. The photoelectric collection it does, adjust the channel gain.
board goes wrong. 3. Check if the cables on the AD
4. Unplug the cables from the AD
collection board and pre-amplification
board and perform the dark current
fluctuation test again. Check if the
failure is related to the pre-amplification
board. If yes, replace the optical

10 Troubleshooting
measurement assembly.
C07009 Light Source Warning Water blank out of L! 1. Overflow (only BS-240). 1. Check if the cuvette is overflowing
range (10X). 2. The lamp has been replaced (only BS-240).
incorrectly. 2. Check if the Replace Lamp command is
3. Cuvette Check is not executed during lamp replacement.
performed after cuvette 3. Check if the Cuvette Check command
maintenance. is executed after cuvette maintenance.
4. Wash solution inside the 4. Check if the cleaning liquid inside the
cuvette is little (only BS-240). cuvette is no less than half of the cuvette
5. The cable connector or (only BS-240).
retaining screw of the lamp are 5. Check if the cable connectors and
not tightened. retaining screw of the lamp have been
6. The lamp is aging. tightened.
7. The photometer goes wrong. 6. Check if the reaction curve fluctuates
irregularly. If yes, replace the lamp.
C07012 Others Warning Storage device error; / No floppy disk or U disk is Check if a USB drive or floppy disk is
Cannot import data inserted. No file is found in the inserted or full. Check if the storage
floppy disk or U disk, or file device is damaged.
error, or file is damaged. The
floppy disk or U disk is locked or
damaged.

10 Troubleshooting
C07013 Others Warning Storage device error. / No floppy disk or U disk is Check if a USB drive or floppy disk is
Cannot export data inserted. Insufficient disk space. inserted or full. Check if the storage
The floppy disk or U disk is device is damaged.
locked or damaged.
C07014 Others Warning Biochemistry reagent / All reagents of the reagent type Refill or replace the reagent.
exhausted for the chemistry are less than
Chemistry: the minimum limit. All reagents
Position: of the type are too little to be
detected.
C07016 Others Warning Insufficient wash / Insufficient wash solution on the Refill the wash solution on the
solution. Position: sample/reagent carousel. sample/reagent carousel.
C07017 Others Warning Wash solution is / The wash solution on the Refill the wash solution on the
exhausted. sample/reagent carousel is sample/reagent carousel.
Position: exhausted.
C07022 Others Warning Less than X tests are / All reagents of the reagent type Refill or replace the reagent.
left in biochemistry for the chemistry are less than
reagent the minimum limit. All reagents
Chemistry: of the type are too little to be
detected.
C07023 Others Warning Chemistry:%s, 30 / The calibration factors are about Recalibrate the chemistry.
minutes left for next to be expired.
calibration.

10 Troubleshooting
C07027 Others Warning Calibrator %s has been / The calibrator is expired. Replace the calibrator.
expired
C07028 Others Warning Chemistry: %s, lot / Expired reagent Replace the reagent.
No.: %s,position: %s,
has been expired
C07029 Others Warning Chemistry: %s, lot / The uncapping time of the Replace the reagent.
No.: %s, reagent pack is too long.
position: %s, has
exceeded the
uncapping time
C07034 Others Warning Insufficient / Insufficient physiological saline Refill the physiological saline on the
physiological saline on on sample/reagent carousel sample/reagent carousel.
sample/reagent
carousel
Position:
C07035 Others Warning Physiological saline on / Physiological saline on Refill the physiological saline on the
sample/reagent sample/reagent carousel is sample/reagent carousel.
carousel is exhausted. exhausted
Position:
C07036 Others Warning Chemistry:%s. / The calibration factors have been Recalibrate the chemistry.
Calibration factors are expired.
expired
C07037 Others Warning Reagent bottle / Serial number of the reagent is Reagent serial number of the chemistry is
number of %s changed. changed. Please recalibrate
chemistry is changed.
Please recalibrate
C07038 Others Warning Reagent bottle / Lot number of the reagent is Reagent lot number of the chemistry is
number of %s changed. changed. Please recalibrate
chemistry is changed.
Please recalibrate

10 Troubleshooting
C07039 Others Warning Calibration factors / The calibration factors are The calibration factors are expired.
of %s chemistry are expired.
expired. Recalibrate
C07040 Others Warning Biochemistry reagent / Reagent is exhausted. Refill or replace the reagent.
exhausted. Reagent level cannot be
Chemistry: detected.
C07041 Others Error Less than X tests are / Inventory of the ISE reagent is Check the inventory, and refill ISE
left in ISE reagent lower than the alarm limit. reagent if necessary.
C07042 Others Warning %s, Lot number:%s, / One or more special reagents Replace the reagent.
position: %s, has been have expired.
expired
C07043 / Warning / / Pretreat reagent is exhausted Replenish pretreat reagent (only BS-240)
(only BS-240)
C07044 / Warning / / Pretreat reagent is deficient Replenish pretreat reagent (only BS-240)
(only BS-240)
c / Warning / / ISE wash solution is exhausted. Replenish ISE wash solution
C07046 / Warning / / Insufficient ISE wash solution. Replenish ISE wash solution

10 Troubleshooting
10.2 Error feedback sheet

BS-240 Analyzer Error Feedback Sheet
Serial No. Hospital Installation

Name date
Error date Software Customer
version service
engineer
and Tel
Problem Description
Error Error process (for software problems, describe detailed operation steps,
content preferably give screenshot).
Error occurrence time (yy/mm/dd/hh/mm; give software alarm reporting time if

any)
Error description:
Software alarm code:
Error Always; frequent: times per hour; occasional: times per day; not
frequency repeatable; other
On-site Effects
Corrective
Actions

10 Troubleshooting
Document The customer service engineer should feed back the following documents:
AlarmFile corresponding to the error date;
Address: D:\Mindray\BS240\OperationSoft\AlarmFile;
LOG file corresponding to the error date;
Address: D:\Mindray\BS240\OperationSoft\WorkstationLOG;
D:\Mindray\BS240\OperationSoft\Instrument_1\InstrumentLOG;
3) Provide screenshots in the case of software issues.
4) If abnormal halt or database error occurs, return the database file in the
following path:
Address: D:\Mindray\BS240\OperationSoft\DataBase\Backup (Copy the file under
this folder after restarting the computer)
5) If a failure leading to abnormal clinical results occurs, return the database file
in the following path as well as the reaction curve data of the failure date:
Address: D:\Mindray\BS240\OperationSoft\DataBase\Backup (Copy the file under
this folder after restarting the computer)
D:\Mindray\BS240\OperationSoft\AbsData
Note: Do not export the logs through the software screen.
R&D The R&D engineer confirms the foregoing faults and gives corrective measures
response and plans.
BS-240 Chemistry Analyzer Service Manual

P/N:046-009169-00(1.0)

BS-240 - Service Manual - V1.0 - EN PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-240 - Service Manual - V1.0 - EN PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-240 Operator's Manual i

ii BS-240 Service Manual

BS-240 Service Manual iii

Customer service department

iv BS-240 Service Manual

BS-240 Service Manual 1

BS-240 Service Manual 1

Symbol Text Description

2 BS-240 Service Manual

Electric shock hazards

Moving Parts Hazards

Photometer lamp hazards

BS-240 Service Manual 3

Sample, calibrator and control hazards

Reagent and wash solution hazards

System disposal hazards

4 BS-240 Service Manual

Removal of analyzer from use for repair or disposal

BS-240 Service Manual 5

Electromagnetic noise precautions

6 BS-240 Service Manual

BS-240 Service Manual 7

ISE module precautions

8 BS-240 Service Manual

ISE calibration precautions

ISE wash solution biohazards

BS-240 Service Manual 9

External equipment precautions

Tube and liquid container precautions

10 BS-240 Service Manual

Non-warning labels and silkscreen

In vitro diagnostic equipment

European community representative

BS-240 Service Manual 11

Main power switch: ON

Main power switch: OFF

Analyzer power switch

12 BS-240 Service Manual

Interfaces for fluid connection

BS-240 Service Manual 13

14 BS-240 Service Manual

Moving parts warning

Photometer lamp warning

BS-240 Service Manual 15

Liquid level floater

Cuvette replacement window

16 BS-240 Service Manual

Intellectual Property Statement ............................................................................................................................................. ii

Safety information ··································································································· 1

1 System Description ······························································································1-1

1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

2 System Performance and Workflow ··········································································2-1

2.1 Major Specifications ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-2

BS-240 Service Manual I

2.1.5 Specifications of Operation Unit .............................................................................................................. 2-7

3 Installation Requirements and Procedure ··································································3-1

3.1 Check before Installation ............................................................................................................................................... 3-2

II BS-240 Service Manual

4 Software Introduction ··························································································4-1

4.1 Software Installation ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-2

5 Modules and Units ·······························································································5-1

5.1 Shell Assembly .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2